Manual Book ALFOPlus - Mn00273e - 2 PDF

ALFOplus
Access Link Full Outdoor
User Manual
MN.00273.E - 004
The information contained in this handbook is subject to change without notice.
Property of Siae Microelettronica S.p.A. All rights reserved according to the law and according to the inter-
national regulations. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means, electronic or mechanical, without written permission from Siae Microelettronica S.p.A.
Unless otherwise specified, reference to a Company, name, data and address produced on the screen dis-
played is purely indicative aiming at illustrating the use of the product.
MS-DOS®, MS Windows® are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
HP®, HP OpenView NNM and HP–UX are Hewlett Packard Company registered trademarks.
UNIX is a UNIX System Laboratories registered trademark.
Oracle® is a Oracle Corporation registered trademark.
Linux term is a trademark registered by Linus Torvalds, the original author of the Linux operating system.
Linux is freely distributed according the GNU General Public License (GPL).
Other products cited here in are constructor registered trademarks.
Contents
Section 1.
USER GUIDE 7
1 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY ............................................................................... 7
2 FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK AND SAFETY RULES .......................................... 8

2.1 FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK ..................................................................... 8
2.1.1 Artificial respiration .................................................................................. 8
2.1.2 Treatment of burns .................................................................................. 8
2.2 SAFETY RULES .................................................................................................10
2.3 CORRECT DISPOSAL OF THIS PRODUCT (WASTE ELECTRICAL &
ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT) .................................................................................11
3 PURPOSE AND STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL ............................................................12

3.1 PURPOSE OF THE MANUAL .................................................................................12
3.2 AUDIENCE BASIC KNOWLEDGE ..........................................................................12
3.3 STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL .............................................................................12
Section 2.
DESCRIPTIONS AND SPECIFICATION 15
4 LIST OF ACRONYMS .................................................................................................15

4.1 LIST OF ACRONYMS ..........................................................................................15
5 SYSTEM PRESENTATION ..........................................................................................17

5.1 GENERAL.........................................................................................................17
5.2 APPLICATIONS .................................................................................................17
5.2.1 Functionality ..........................................................................................18
5.3 PROGRAMMABILITY ..........................................................................................18
6 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION ....................................................................................23

6.1 INTERNATIONAL STANDARD ..............................................................................23
6.2 MAIN CHARACTERISTICS...................................................................................25
6.2.1 Adaptive modulation ...............................................................................39
6.3 LINE INTERFACE CHARACTERISTICS ...................................................................42
6.3.1 Ethernet optical interface characteristics ....................................................46
MN.00273.E - 004 1
6.4 POWER SUPPLY AND CABLE ...............................................................................46
6.4.1 PoE injector ...........................................................................................47
6.4.1.1 PoE injector functionality ...........................................................47
6.4.1.2 Code table...............................................................................48
6.4.1.3 Electrical characteristics ............................................................49
6.4.1.4 Connectors ..............................................................................49
6.4.1.5 Description of alarms ................................................................49
6.5 WAVEGUIDE FLANGE ........................................................................................50
6.6 MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS........................................................................51
6.7 SURGE AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION .................................................................51
6.8 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS ..........................................................................51
7 EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................52

7.1 GENERAL.........................................................................................................52
7.1.1 Block diagram ........................................................................................52
7.1.2 Baseband processor ................................................................................55
7.1.2.1 Firmware ................................................................................55
7.1.2.2 Web Lct ..................................................................................55
7.1.2.3 Alarm system ..........................................................................55
7.1.3 TRX Transceiver unit ...............................................................................56
7.1.4 Switch for Ethernet ports .........................................................................56
7.1.5 Synchronisation ......................................................................................58
7.1.6 Adaptive code modulation ........................................................................59
7.1.7 ATPC and ACM interaction ........................................................................60
7.2 LOOPS ............................................................................................................62
7.3 RATE LIMITING AND INGRESS FILTER POLICING ..................................................62
7.3.1 Rate limiting ..........................................................................................62
7.3.2 Ingress filtering policy (CIR/EIR according to MEF 10.2) ...............................62
7.4 CONGESTION AVOIDANCE .................................................................................65
7.5 ETHERNET OAM (OPERATION ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE) .....................72
7.5.1 Service layer OAM...................................................................................72
7.6 ETHERNET PERFORMANCE MONITORING - RMON ..................................................74
7.7 RMON COUNTERS .............................................................................................75
7.8 ADVANCED STATISTIC MONITORING FOR SERVICES AND PRIORITY COUNTERS .......76
7.8.1 Priority RMON.........................................................................................76
7.8.2 Service RMON ........................................................................................77
7.9 SYNCHRONISM.................................................................................................77
7.10 SOURCES OF SYNCHRONISM .............................................................................79
7.11 PROVIDE SYNCHRONISM TO EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT .............................................80
7.12 G.8264 SSM – SYNCHRONISATION STATUS MESSAGE...........................................81
7.12.1 SSM on Ethernet Interfaces ......................................................................82
Section 3.
INSTALLATION 85
8 INSTALLATION OF ALFOPlus SYSTEM ......................................................................85

8.1 GENERAL INFORMATION TO BE READ BEFORE THE INSTALLATION..........................85
8.2 GENERAL.........................................................................................................86
8.3 ELECTRICAL WIRING.........................................................................................86
2 MN.00273.E - 004
8.4 CONNECTIONS TO THE SUPPLY MAINS ................................................................86
8.5 GROUNDING CONNECTION ................................................................................87
8.5.1 Mounting instructions of grounding cable kit ICD00072F (universal - no tools).87
8.6 REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED) .............................................89
8.7 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ...............................................................................89
8.7.1 Standard coupling kit ..............................................................................89
8.8 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA .............89
8.8.1 ODU (Standard Lock) ..............................................................................89
8.8.1.1 1+0 ODU with integrated antenna ..............................................90
8.8.1.2 1+1 ODU with integrated antenna ..............................................90
8.9 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA...............92
8.9.1 ODU (Standard Lock) ..............................................................................92
8.9.1.1 1+0 ODU with separated antenna...............................................92
8.9.1.2 1+1 ODU with separated antenna...............................................93
8.9.1.3 Waveguide towards the antenna.................................................93
8.10 GROUNDING ....................................................................................................94
8.11 USER CONNECTORS........................................................................................ 101
8.11.1 Auxiliary connector ............................................................................... 101
8.11.2 RJ45 connector..................................................................................... 103
8.11.3 Optical connector .................................................................................. 112
8.11.4 Optical SFP mounting procedure ............................................................. 113
8.11.5 Optical SFP unmounting procedure .......................................................... 113
Section 4.
LINE-UP 119
9 LINE-UP OF ALFOPlus SYSTEM ...............................................................................119

9.1 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 119
9.2 SWITCH ON ................................................................................................... 119
9.3 ALARM LED CHECK ......................................................................................... 120
9.4 CONNECTION PROCEDURE............................................................................... 120
9.5 FIRST CONFIGURATION................................................................................... 122
9.6 OPTIMIZING ANTENNA ALIGNMENT WITH RX MEASUREMENT ............................... 127
9.7 ODU ACCESSING AND REMOTE MANAGEMENT.................................................... 130
9.8 COMMISSIONING MEASURES FOR ETHERNET TRAFFIC ........................................ 131
9.8.1 Ethernet connection stability .................................................................. 131
9.9 FIRMWARE .................................................................................................... 132
9.10 BACK UP FULL EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION WITHOUT POSSIBILITY OF
MODIFYING THE PARAMETERS ......................................................................... 133
9.10.1 Scope.................................................................................................. 133
9.10.2 Configuration upload and download using SCT .......................................... 133
9.10.3 Configuration upload and download using WEBLCT .................................... 134
MN.00273.E - 004 3
Section 5.
MAINTENANCE 135
10 ALFOPlus ALARMS AND LOOPS...............................................................................135

10.1 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 135
10.2 ALARMS ........................................................................................................ 135
10.2.1 Alarm indications .................................................................................. 135
10.2.2 SCT/WebLCT displayed alarms................................................................ 136
11 ALFOPlus MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING ...............................................139

11.1 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 139
11.2 MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................... 139
11.2.1 Periodical checks .................................................................................. 139
11.2.2 Corrective maintenance (troubleshooting) ................................................ 140
11.3 TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................................................................... 140
11.3.1 Faulty condition detection ...................................................................... 140
11.3.2 Troubleshooting of a faulty unit .............................................................. 141
Section 6.
PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION 143
12 PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION .......................................................................143

12.1 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 143
12.2 SUPERVISION THROUGH ETHERNET.................................................................. 143
12.2.1 General ............................................................................................... 144
12.2.2 Configurations ...................................................................................... 145
12.2.3 "Local Access only" management ............................................................ 145
12.2.4 "VLAN based in-band" management ........................................................ 146
12.2.5 "VLAN based In-band" drop node ............................................................ 146
12.2.6 "Out-of-band" management ................................................................... 147
12.2.7 Configurability ...................................................................................... 147
12.2.8 Address ............................................................................................... 147
12.2.9 Restore supervisioning access mode ........................................................ 147
Section 7.
COMPOSITION 149
13 COMPOSITION .......................................................................................................149
13.1 GENERALS ..................................................................................................... 149
13.2 ALFOPLUS SYSTEM IDENTIFYING LABEL ............................................................ 149
13.3 AVAILABLE ALFOPLUS VERSIONS ..................................................................... 149
13.4 ODU INSTALLATION KIT .................................................................................. 154
4 MN.00273.E - 004
Section 8.
ADDENDUM 155
14 INTRODUCTION .....................................................................................................155
14.1 GENERALS ..................................................................................................... 155
15 ALFOplus 11GHZ CHARACTERISTICS......................................................................156

15.1 FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 156
15.2 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 156
15.2.1 Available frequencies............................................................................. 156
15.2.2 Transmitter characteristics ..................................................................... 161
15.2.3 Receiver characteristics ......................................................................... 162
15.2.4 Radio flange ......................................................................................... 164
15.2.5 Power supply and consumption ............................................................... 165
15.2.6 Mechanical characteristics ...................................................................... 165
16 ALFOPLUS 13GHz CHARACTERISTICS ....................................................................166

16.1 FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 166
16.2 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 166
16.2.4 Radio flange ......................................................................................... 172
17 ALFOPLUS 15GHz CHARACTERISTICS ....................................................................173

17.1 FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 173
17.2 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 173
17.2.4 Radio flange ......................................................................................... 184
18 ALFOPLUS 17 GHZ CHARACTERISTICS ...................................................................185

18.1 FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 185
18.2 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 185
18.2.4 Radio flange ......................................................................................... 190

19.1 FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 191
19.2 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 191
MN.00273.E - 004 5
19.2.4 Radio flange ......................................................................................... 199

20.1 FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 200
20.2 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 200
20.2.4 Radio flange ......................................................................................... 210

21.1 FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 212
21.2 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 212
21.2.4 Radio flange ......................................................................................... 217
Section 9.
LISTS AND SERVICES 219
22 LIST OF FIGURES ...................................................................................................219
23 LIST OF TABLES .....................................................................................................223
24 ASSISTANCE SERVICE............................................................................................227
6 MN.00273.E - 004
Section 1.
USER GUIDE
1 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
SIAE MICROELETTRONICA
Via Buonarroti, 21 - Cologno (MI) - Italy
DECLARES
THAT THE PRODUCTS
Digital Radio Relay System ALFOplus

comply with the essential requirements of article 3 of the
R&TTE Directive (1999/05/EC)
and therefore are marked:
The following standards have been applied:
IEEE 802.3 for Ethernet interface
EN 301 489-4 for EMC
EN 60950 for operator safety
EN 302 217 for digital point to point fixed radio
EN 300 132-2 characteristics of power supply
EN 300 019 climatic characteristics (in operation: class 4.1 for ODU; storing: class 1.2; transport: class
2.3)
The equipment makes use of non-harmonized frequency bands.Following the requirements

of the R&TTE Directive (article 12) and the relevant decision of the EC, in term of classifica-
tion of Radio Equipment and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment and associated iden-
tifiers, the ALFO shall carry the 'class 2' identifier:
Cologno Monzese, 17/03/2008 On behalf of SIAE MICROELETTRONICA

Chairman and Executive Officer
Alberto Mascetti
MN.00273.E - 004 7
2 FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK AND SAFETY
RULES
2.1 FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK
Do not touch the bare hands until the circuit has been opened. pen the circuit by switching off the line
switches. If that is not possible protect yourself with dry material and free the patient from the con-
ductor.
2.1.1 Artificial respiration
It is important to start mouth resuscitation at once and to call a doctor immediately. suggested procedure
for mouth to mouth resuscitation method is described in the Tab.1.
2.1.2 Treatment of burns
This treatment should be used after the patient has regained consciousness. It can also be employed while
artificial respiration is being applied (in this case there should be at least two persons present).
Warning
• Do not attempt to remove clothing from burnt sections
• Apply dry gauze on the burns

• Do not apply ointments or other oily substances.
8 MN.00273.E - 004
Tab.1 - Artificial respiration
Step Description Figure
Lay the patient on his back with his arms parallel to the body.
If the patient is laying on an inclined plane, make sure that his
1 stomach is slightly lower than his chest. Open the patients
mouth and check that there is no foreign matter in mouth (den-
tures, chewing gum, etc.).
Kneel beside the patient level with his head. Put an hand under
the patient’s head and one under his neck.
Lift the patient’s head and let it recline backwards as far

2 as possible.
Shift the hand from the patient’s neck to his chin and his
mouth, the index along his jawbone, and keep the other fingers
closed together.
3 While performing these operations take a good supply of oxy-

gen by taking deep breaths with your mouth open
With your thumb between the patient’s chin and mouth keep
his lips together and blow into his nasal cavities
While performing these operations observe if the patient’s

chest rises. If not it is possible that his nose is blocked: in that
case open the patient’s mouth as much as possible by pressing
on his chin with your hand, place your lips around his mouth
and blow into his oral cavity. Observe if the patient’s chest
5
heaves. This second method can be used instead of the first
even when the patient’s nose is not obstructed, provided his
nose is kept closed by pressing the nostrils together using the
hand you were holding his head with. The patient’s head must
be kept sloping backwards as much as possible.
Start with ten rapid expirations, hence continue at a rate of

twelve/fifteen expirations per minute. Go on like this until the
6
patient has regained conscious–ness, or until a doctor has as-
certained his death.
MN.00273.E - 004 9
2.2 SAFETY RULES
When the equipment units are provided with the plate, shown in Fig.1, it means that they contain compo-
nents electrostatic charge sensitive.
Fig.1 - Components electrostatic charge sensitive indication
In order to prevent the units from being damaged while handling, it is advisable to wear an elasticized band
(Fig.2) around the wrist ground connected through coiled cord (Fig.3).
Fig.2 - Elasticized band
Fig.3 - Coiled cord
The units showing the label, shown in Fig.4, include laser diodes and the emitted power can be dangerous
for eyes; avoid exposure in the direction of optical signal emission.
Fig.4 - Laser indication
10 MN.00273.E - 004
2.3 CORRECT DISPOSAL OF THIS PRODUCT (WASTE ELECTRICAL &
ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT)
(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems). This
marking of Fig.5 shown on the product or its literature, indicates that it should not be disposed with other
household wastes at the end of its working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human
health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate this from other types of wastes and recycle it
responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. Household users should contact either
the retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of where and
how they can take this item for environmentally safe recycling. Business users should contact their supplier
and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product should not be mixed with other
commercial wastes for disposal.
Fig.5 - WEEE symbol - 2002/96/CE EN50419
MN.00273.E - 004 11
3 PURPOSE AND STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL
3.1 PURPOSE OF THE MANUAL
The purpose of this manual consists in providing for the user information which permit to operate and
maintain the ALFOplus radio equipment.
Warning: This manual does not include information relevant to the SCT/WebLCT management program
windows and relevant application. They will provided by the program itself as help–on line.
3.2 AUDIENCE BASIC KNOWLEDGE
The following knowledge and skills are required to operate the equipment:
• a basic understanding of microwave transmission
• installation and maintenance experience on digital radio system
• a good knowledge of IP networks and routing policy.
3.3 STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL
The manual is subdivided into sections each of them developing a specific topic entitling the section.
Each section consists of a set of chapters, enlarging the main subject master.
Section 1 – User Guide
It provides the information about the main safety rules and expounds the purpose and the structure of the
manual.
Section 2 – Description and specifications
It describes a general overview of the typical applications and in particular of the whole radio equipment.
Section 3 – Installation
The mechanical installation procedures are herein set down as well as the user electrical connections.
The content of the tool kit (if supplied) is also listed.
12 MN.00273.E - 004
Section 4 – Line–Up
Line–up procedures are described as well as checks to be carried out for the equipment correct operation.
The list of the instruments to be used and their characteristics are also set down.
Section 5 – Maintenance
The routine maintenance actions are described as well as fault location procedures in order to identify the
faulty unit and to re–establish the operation after its replacement with a spare one.
Section 6 – Programming and supervision
The ALFOplus radio is programmed and supervised using different software tools. Some of them are al-
ready available, some other will be available in the future. This section lists the tools implemented and
indicates if descriptions are already available.
Each description of software tools is supplied in a separated manual.
Section 7 – Composition
Position, part numbers of the components the equipment consist of, are shown in this section.
Section 8 – Addendum
ALFOplus technical radio specifications, available for each frequency, are described in this section.
Section 9 – Indexes and services
Lists of figures, list of tables and assistance service are shown in this section.
MN.00273.E - 004 13
14 MN.00273.E - 004
Section 2.
DESCRIPTIONS AND
SPECIFICATION
4 LIST OF ACRONYMS
4.1 LIST OF ACRONYMS
What follows is a list of acronyms used in this handbook:
- ACM Adaptive Code Modulation

- AGC Automatic Gain Control
- ATPC Automatic Transmitted Power Control
- BBP Base Band Processor
- BER Bit Error Rate
- CBS Committed Burst Size
- CF Coupling Flag
- CIR Committed Information Rate
- CoS Class of Service
- CVID Customer VLAN Identifier
- DSCP Differentiated Serviced Code Point
- EBS Excess Burst Size
- EIR Excess Information Rate
- ELP Ethernet Line Protection
- EVC Ethernet Virtual Connection
- FPGA Field Programmable Gate-Array
- IP ToS Type of Service IP
- LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol or Link Trunk
- LAN Local Area Network
MN.00273.E - 004 15
- LLF Link Loss Forwarding
- LNA Low Noise Amplifier
- MAC Media Access Control
- MDI Medium Dependent Interface
- MDX Medium Dependent Interface Crossover
- MEF Metro Ethernet Forum
- NE Network Element
- OAM Operation Administration and Maintenance
- ODU Outdoor Unit
- PLL Phase Locked Loop
- POE Power Over Ethernet

- PToS Priority Type of Service
- QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
- RED Random Early Drop

- RF Radio Frequency
- RSSI Received Signal Strength Indicator
- RX Direction from antenna to user

- SCT Subnetwork Craft Terminal
- SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
- SVID Service VLAN Identifier

- TX Direction from user to antenna
- UNI User Network Interface
- VCO Voltage Controlled Oscillator

- VID Virtual Lan Identifier
- VLAN Virtual LAN
- WEBLCT WEB Local Craft Terminal

- WRR Weighted Round Robin
16 MN.00273.E - 004
5 SYSTEM PRESENTATION
5.1 GENERAL
ALFOplus is a full-outdoor and full IP digital radio system for point-to-point applications, used for high ca-
pacity Ethernet transport (1 Gbps). The frequency range is from 6 GHz up to 42 GHz with hitless adaptive
code modulation (from 4QAM up to 1024QAM).
There are two available versions for ALFOplus: Gigabit Electrical (GE) and Gigabit Optical (GO). This doc-
ument provides a general overview of ALFOplus (Access Link Full Outdoor) radio equipment.
5.2 APPLICATIONS
ALFOplus is the ideal solution in urban environments for all carrier-class applications in which the typical
requirements are Ethernet connections:
• full IP radio, providing the foundation for a leading edge network

• fully integrable with 3G, 4G, LTE nodes and backhaul
• ideal for a fast and flexible evolution towards full IP network
• complementary solutions for fibre deploy

• last mile fibre extension for business customers
• ISP high capacity and performance, for LAN-to-LAN connections
• emergency wireless links

• zero footprint applications
ALFOplus doesn’t need any indoor unit; power supply can be directly by POE+ through the data cable or
through a dedicated auxiliary port. It’s available 1+0 or 1+1 radio system configurable via software fol-
lowing two versions of ALFOplus:
• Electrical Gigabit Version
- LAN1 - 1x10/100/1000BaseT traffic and/or supervision port with clock, synchronism recovery
and PoE
- LAN2 - 1x10/100/1000BaseT supervision and/or traffic port with clock and synchronism recov-
ery
• Optical Gigabit Version
- LAN1 - 1x100/1000BaseX traffic and/or supervision port with clock and synchronism recovery
- LAN2 - 1x100/1000BaseT supervision and/or traffic port with clock, synchronism recovery and
PoE
depending on software configuration made for each port LAN1 and LAN2.
MN.00273.E - 004 17
5.2.1 Functionality
SIAE ALFOplus radio system presents the same functionalities of a “switch” (Layer 2).
ALFOplus radio system is able to forward Virtual LAN in transparent way or to manage incoming traffic fil-
tering it or tagging it or dividing it in different VLAN. Traffic Flow control and Traffic priority capabilities can
be enabled or disabled via LAN software.
ALFOplus Ethernet switch functionality:
• MAC switching, Learning and Ageing
• Jumbo Frame up to 10 kbytes
• MEF 10.2 bandwidth profiles for Ethernet Services
• IEEE 802.1Q VLAN/IEEE VLAN stacking QinQ and VLAN rewriting
• LLF (Link Loss Forwarding)
• IEEE 802.3x Flow control

• Flexible QoS based on VLAN (IEEE 802.1p), MPLS Exp BIT, ToS/DSCP (IPV4 or IPV6) per Port,
802.1p rewrite with MPLS
• Queue Packet with Drop Policy: Tail Drop, Queue Drop, Red, Wred/Strict, WFQ, Mixed
• Ethernet Frame Fragmentation
• Advanced multi-layer 1/2/3/4 header Ethernet compressor algorithm
• IEEE 802.1d STP (Spanning Tree Protocol)

• IEEE 802.1v RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol)
• IEEE 802.1ag OAM (Operation, Administration and Maintenance)/ITU-T y.1731/IEEE 802.3 ah
• IEEE 802.3ad LACP - Link Aggregation Control Protocol or Trunking Line or Link Aggregation
• IEEE 802.3af PoE - Power over Ethernet 1
• Complete Synchronisation Management IEEE 1588 v2 precision time protocol and SSM G8264
(quality SyncE)
• ELP (Ethernet Line Protection)
• ITU G.8032 v2 Ethernet Ring Protection
• Advanced Statistics Monitoring Based VLAN and Priority

• Ethernet performance monitoring - RMon
5.3 PROGRAMMABILITY
ALFOplus radio system is managed by a microprocessor that makes it totally programmable via software
to perform the following functions:
• radio link management
- capacity and modulation

- Link ID
- Tx frequency and power
- ATPC (Automatic Transmission Power Control)
• main management
- IP port configurable and supervisioning
1 With dispensation to maximum power
18 MN.00273.E - 004
- routing table
- remote element list
- alarm severity configuration (modify alarm)
- user manager (password, user, SNMP login)
• operation and maintenance
- permanent Tx Off
- Rx signal threshold alarm
- performance monitoring (G.828, Rx PWR, Tx PWR, ACM) with alarm threshold
- S/N measure
- LAN summary, statistic basis on port, VLAN or Priority
- back-up/restore configuration
- software update
- report&logger maintenance (inventory, fault, commands)
- SNTP alignment
• manual operations (depends on timeout)
- Tx transmitter OFF
- force switch synch

- radio BER test
- radio loop
• Ethernet switch management and functionalities

• synchronisation
More links can be managed by LAN access (see Fig.7).
MN.00273.E - 004 19
254 mm
254 mm
157 mm
Fig.6 - ALFOplus front/side view
20 MN.00273.E - 004
Inband management (without VLAN)
MN.00273.E - 004
payload + 1 1 1 1 1
ALFO ALFO ALFO ALFO
manag.
plus plus plus plus
Outband management (without VLAN)
1 1 1
payload 1 1
ALFO ALFO ALFO ALFO
2 2 2
manag. 2 plus plus plus
plus
Fig.7 - Reachable links in ALFOplus sub-network

Inband management (with VLAN)
payload (VLANx) +
manag. (VLANy) 1 1 1 1 1
ALFO ALFO ALFO ALFO
plus plus plus plus
21
payload + payload +
manag. 1 ALFO ALFO 1
manag.
plus plus
payload +
manag. 2 2 payload +
manag.
Switch Switch
Fig.8 - In-band management
payload + payload +
manag. 1 ALFO ALFO 1
manag.
plus plus
management only management only
2 2
IP1 IP1
IP2 IP2
Fig.9 - Drop node
payload 1 ALFO ALFO 1 payload
plus plus 2
2
management only
X X management only
MNGT MNGT
Fig.10 - LAO (Local Access Only)
22 MN.00273.E - 004
6 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
For more details, refer to Section 8. ADDENDUM.
6.1 INTERNATIONAL STANDARD
The equipment complies with the following international standard:
- EMC EN 301 489-4
- RF channel arrangement see Tab.2
Tab.2 - Go-return frequency
Frequency band
Duplex Spacing Channel number Subbands
(GHz)
6L ITU-R F.383-8 and CEPT REC 14-01E - 252.04 MHz 3CH @ 29.65MHz 4
6U ITU-R F.384-10 - 340 MHz 3CH @ 40MHz 2
7.1 - 7.4 ITU-R F.385-9 Annex 3 - 196 MHz 3CH @ 28MHz 3
7.1 - 7.4 ITU-R F.385-9 - 161 MHz 2CH @ 28MHz 3
7.1 - 7.4 CEPT REC(02)06 - 154 MHz 2CH @ 28MHz 3
7.1 - 7.4 168 MHz 2CH @ 28MHz 3
7.4 - 7.7 ITU-R F.385-9 - 161 MHz 2CH @ 28MHz 3
7.4 - 7.7 CEPT REC(02)06 - 154 MHz 2CH @ 28MHz 3
7.7 - 8.2 ITU-R F.386-8 Annex 6 - 311.32 MHz 4CH @ 29.65MHz 4
7.9 - 8.5 CEPT ECC REC(02)06 310 MHz 3CH @ 28MHz 3
8.2 - 8.5 ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 3 - 119/126 MHz 2CH @ 28MHz 3
11 CEPT T/R 12-06 and ITU-R F387-10 - 490/530 MHz 4CH @ 40MHz 3
13 ITU-R F.497 - CEPT ERC/REC 12-02 E - 266MHz 3CH @ 28MHz 3
15 ITU-R F636 - 420 MHz 4CH @ 28MHz 4
15 ITU-R F636 - 490 MHz 4CH @ 28MHz 4
15 ITU-R F636 - 644 MHz 4CH @ 28MHz 2
15 CEPT T/R 12-07 - 728 MHz 4CH @ 28MHz 1
MN.00273.E - 004 23
15 CEPT - 315 MHz 3CH @ 28MHz 5
15 CEPT - 322 MHz 3CH @ 28MHz 5
17 SRD ERC REC 70-03 (unlicensed) 12CH @ 28 MHz 1
18 ITU-R F.595 - Annex 7 - 1560 MHz 15CH @ 27.5MHz 1
23 ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 3 CEPT T/R 13-02 - 1008 MHz 11CH @ 28MHz 2
23 ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 4 - 1200 MHz 11CH @ 28MHz 3
23 ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex1 - 1232 MHz 11CH @ 28MHz 3
26 ITU-R F.748 - Annex 1 and CEPT T/R 13-02 - 1008 MHz 16CH @ 28MHz 2
32 ITU-R F.1520 and CEPT Rec (01)02 - 812 MHz 10CH @ 28MHz 3
38 ITU-R F.749 and CEPT Rec T/R 12-01 - 1260 MHz 20CH @ 28MHz 2
42 ECC Rec (01)04 - 1500 MHz 18CH @ 28MHz (520 MHz) 3
- Digital fixed point to point EN 301 128
- Climatic characteristics EN 300 019 (class 4.1 for ODU;

storage: class 1.2; transport: class 2.3)
- Safety EN60950
24 MN.00273.E - 004
6.2 MAIN CHARACTERISTICS
- Tx power see Tab.3
- Tolerance ± 2dB
Tab.3 - Tx power
ALFOplus series Nominal output power (dBm)
Frequency Band
4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 256LQAM 512QAM 1KQAM
(GHz)
6 28 28 25 25 24 24 24 24 24 24 23
7 28 28 25 25 24 24 24 24 24 24 23
8 28 28 25 25 24 24 24 24 24 24 23
10.5 28 28 25 25 24 24 24 24 24 24 23
11 27 27 24 24 23 23 23 23 23 23 22
13 27 27 24 24 23 23 23 23 23 23 22
15 27 27 24 24 23 23 23 23 23 23 22
17 22 22 20 20 18 18 18 18 18 18 17
18 23 23 21 21 19 19 19 19 19 19 18
23 23 23 21 21 19 19 19 19 19 19 18
26 22 22 20 20 18 18 18 18 18 18 17
28 21 21 19 19 17 17 17 17 17 17 16
32 20 20 18 18 16 16 16 16 16 16 15
38 19 19 17 17 15 15 15 15 15 15 14
42 17 17 15 15 13 13 13 13 13 13 12
- RF output attenuation up to 20 dB, 1 dB step software adjustable
- Automatic transmit power control (ATPC range 20 dB, implemented in 1dB step
- Remote transmit power control (RTPC range 20 dB, implemented
- Transmitter return loss GB8000 15 dB

GB9000 6 dB
- Stability in frequency ±5ppm, ±10ppm (including ageing)
- Muting 60dB, related to maximum transmitted power
- Receiver threshold with BER = 10-3 see Tab.4
MN.00273.E - 004 25
Tab.4 - Receiver thresholds (interleave enabled)
Radio Nominal RSL

Physical Mode
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM
MHz
BER=10-6 -95.5 -93.0 -89.5 -86.5 -84.5 -82.0 -78.5 -76.0 -73.0 -69.5
7
BER=10-10 -93.5 -91.0 -87.5 -84.5 -82.5 -80.0 -76.5 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5
-6
BER=10 -94.5 -91.5 -88.0 -85.0 -83.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.5 -71.5 -67.5
10
BER=10-10 -92.5 -89.5 -86.0 -83.0 -81.0 -78.5 -75.0 -72.5 -69.5 -65.5
BER=10-6 -94.5 -91.0 -87.5 -84.5 -82.5 -80.0 -76.5 -73.5 -70.5 -66.5
14
BER=10-10 -92.5 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.5 -64.5
-6
BER=10 -91.5 -88.0 -84.5 -81.5 -80.0 -77.0 -74.0 -70.5 -68.0 -64.0
28
-10
BER=10 -89.5 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -78.0 -75.0 -72.0 -68.5 -66.0 -62.0
BER=10-6 -91.0 -87.5 -84.0 -81.0 -79.5 -76.5 -73.5 -70.0 -67.5 -63.5
30
-10
BER=10 -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.5 -74.5 -71.5 -68.0 -65.5 -61.5
-6
BER=10 -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -76.5 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5 -65.0 -60.5
56
BER=10-10 -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -58.5
6 GHz
Radio Guaranteed RSL
Physical Mode
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
BER=10-6 -93.5 -91.0 -87.5 -84.5 -82.5 -80.0 -76.5 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5
7
BER=10-10 -91.5 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5
-6
BER=10 -92.5 -89.5 -86.0 -83.0 -81.0 -78.5 -75.0 -72.5 -69.5 -65.5
10
BER=10-10 -90.5 -87.5 -84.0 -81.0 -79.0 -76.5 -73.0 -70.5 -67.5 -63.5
BER=10-6 -92.5 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.5 -64.5
14
-10
BER=10 -90.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -78.5 -76.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.5 -62.5
BER=10-6 -89.5 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -78.0 -75.0 -72.0 -68.5 -66.0 -62.0
28
BER=10-10 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -76.0 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5 -64.0 -60.0
-6
BER=10 -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.5 -74.5 -71.5 -68.0 -65.5 -61.5
30
BER=10-10 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.5 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -59.5
BER=10-6 -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -58.5
56
-10
BER=10 -84.5 -81.0 -77.5 -74.5 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5 -61.0 -56.5
26 MN.00273.E - 004
Radio Nominal RSL
Physical Mode
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
BER=10-6 -95.5 -93.0 -89.5 -86.5 -84.5 -82.0 -78.5 -76.0 -73.0 -69.5
7
-10
BER=10 -93.5 -91.0 -87.5 -84.5 -82.5 -80.0 -76.5 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5
BER=10-6 -94.5 -91.0 -87.5 -84.5 -82.5 -80.0 -76.5 -73.5 -70.5 -66.5
14
BER=10-10 -92.5 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.5 -64.5
-6
BER=10 -91.5 -88.0 -84.5 -81.5 -80.0 -77.0 -74.0 -70.5 -68.0 -64.0
28
BER=10-10 -89.5 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -78.0 -75.0 -72.0 -68.5 -66.0 -62.0
BER=10-6 -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -76.5 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5 -65.0 -60.5
56
BER=10-10 -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -58.5
7 GHz
Radio Guaranteed RSL
Physical Mode
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
BER=10-6 -93.5 -91.0 -87.5 -84.5 -82.5 -80.0 -76.5 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5
7
BER=10-10 -91.5 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5
-6
BER=10 -92.5 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.5 -64.5
14
BER=10-10 -90.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -78.5 -76.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.5 -62.5
BER=10-6 -89.5 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -78.0 -75.0 -72.0 -68.5 -66.0 -62.0
28
-10
BER=10 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -76.0 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5 -64.0 -60.0
BER=10-6 -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -58.5
56
BER=10-10 -84.5 -81.0 -77.5 -74.5 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5 -61.0 -56.5
MN.00273.E - 004 27
Radio Nominal RSL
Physical Mode
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
BER=10-6 -95.0 -92.5 -89.0 -86.0 -84.0 -81.5 -78.0 -75.5 -72.5 -69.0
7
-10
BER=10 -93.0 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5
BER=10-6 -94.0 -91.0 -87.5 -84.5 -82.5 -80.0 -76.5 -74.0 -71.0 -67.0
10
BER=10-10 -92.0 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.0
-6
BER=10 -94.0 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.0 -70.0 -66.0
14
BER=10-10 -92.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.0
BER=10-6 -91.0 -87.5 -84.0 -81.0 -79.5 -76.5 -73.5 -70.0 -67.5 -63.5
28
BER=10-10 -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.5 -74.5 -71.5 -68.0 -65.5 -61.5
-6
BER=10 -90.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -79.0 -76.0 -73.0 -69.5 -67.0 -63.0
30
-10
BER=10 -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -77.0 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5 -65.0 -61.0
BER=10-6 -89.5 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -77.5 -75.0 -72.0 -68.5 -66.0 -61.5
40
-10
BER=10 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -75.5 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5 -64.0 -59.5
BER=10-6 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0 -64.5 -60.0
56
11 BER=10-10 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0
GHz Radio Guaranteed RSL
Physical Mode
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
BER=10-6 -93.0 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0
7
BER=10-10 -91.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0
-6
BER=10 -92.0 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.0
10
BER=10-10 -90.0 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -78.5 -76.0 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.0
BER=10-6 -92.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.0
14
-10
BER=10 -90.0 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0 -75.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0
BER=10-6 -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.5 -74.5 -71.5 -68.0 -65.5 -61.5
28
BER=10-10 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.5 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -59.5
-6
BER=10 -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -77.0 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5 -65.0 -61.0
30
BER=10-10 -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -75.0 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -59.0
BER=10-6 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -75.5 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5 -64.0 -59.5
40
-10
BER=10 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -57.5
BER=10-6 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0
56
BER=10-10 -84.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.0 -72.0 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0 -60.5 -56.0
28 MN.00273.E - 004
Radio Nominal RSL
Physical Mode
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
BER=10-6 -95.0 -92.5 -89.0 -86.0 -84.0 -81.5 -78.0 -75.5 -72.5 -69.0
7
-10
BER=10 -93.0 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0
BER=10-6 -94.0 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.0 -70.0 -66.0
14
BER=10-10 -92.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.0
-6
BER=10 -91.0 -87.5 -84.0 -81.0 -79.5 -76.5 -73.5 -70.0 -67.5 -63.5
28
BER=10-10 -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.5 -74.5 -71.5 -68.0 -65.5 -61.5
BER=10-6 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0 -64.5 -60.0
56
13 BER=10-10 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0
Physical Mode
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
BER=10-6 -93.0 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0
7
BER=10-10 -91.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0
-6
BER=10 -92.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.0
14
BER=10-10 -90.0 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0 -75.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0
BER=10-6 -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.5 -74.5 -71.5 -68.0 -65.5 -61.5
28
-10
BER=10 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.5 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -59.5
BER=10-6 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0
56
BER=10-10 -84.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.0 -72.0 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0 -60.5 -56.0
MN.00273.E - 004 29
Radio Nominal RSL
Physical Mode
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
BER=10-6 -95.0 -92.5 -89.0 -86.0 -84.0 -81.5 -78.0 -75.5 -72.5 -69.0
7
-10
BER=10 -93.0 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0
BER=10-6 -94.0 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.0 -70.0 -66.0
14
BER=10-10 -92.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.0
-6
BER=10 -91.0 -87.5 -84.0 -81.0 -79.5 -76.5 -73.5 -70.0 -67.5 -63.5
28
BER=10-10 -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.5 -74.5 -71.5 -68.0 -65.5 -61.5
BER=10-6 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0 -64.5 -60.0
56
15 BER=10-10 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0
Physical Mode
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
BER=10-6 -93.0 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0
7
BER=10-10 -91.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0
-6
BER=10 -92.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.0
14
BER=10-10 -90.0 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0 -75.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0
BER=10-6 -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.5 -74.5 -71.5 -68.0 -65.5 -61.5
28
-10
BER=10 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.5 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -59.5
BER=10-6 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0
56
BER=10-10 -84.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.0 -72.0 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0 -60.5 -56.0
30 MN.00273.E - 004
Radio Nominal RSL
Physical Mode
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
BER=10-6 -93.5 -91.0 -87.5 -84.5 -82.5 -80.0 -76.5 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5
7
-10
BER=10 -91.5 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5
BER=10-6 -92.5 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.5 -64.5
14
BER=10-10 -90.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -78.5 -76.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.5 -62.5
-6
BER=10 -89.5 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -78.0 -75.0 -72.0 -68.5 -66.0 -62.0
28
BER=10-10 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -76.0 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5 -64.0 -60.0
BER=10-6 -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -58.5
56
17 BER=10-10 -84.5 -81.0 -77.5 -74.5 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5 -61.0 -56.5
Physical Mode
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
BER=10-6 -91.5 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5
7
BER=10-10 -89.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -78.5 -76.0 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5
-6
BER=10 -90.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -78.5 76.0 72.5 -69.5 -66.5 -62.5
14
BER=10-10 -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -76.5 -74.0 -70.5 -67.5 -64.5 -60.5
BER=10-6 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -76.0 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5 -64.0 -60.0
28
-10
BER=10 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -58.0
BER=10-6 -84.5 -81.0 -77.5 -74.5 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5 -61.0 -56.5
56
BER=10-10 -82.5 -79.0 -75.5 -72.5 -70.5 -68.0 -65.0 -61.5 -59.0 -54.4
MN.00273.E - 004 31
Radio Nominal RSL
Physical Mode
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
BER=10-6 -94.5 -92.0 -88.5 -85.5 -83.5 -81.0 -77.5 -75.0 -72.0 -68.5
7
-10
BER=10 -92.5 -90.0 -86.5 -83.5 -81.5 -79.0 -75.5 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5
BER=10-6 -93.5 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -66.5
10
BER=10-10 -91.5 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -64.5
-6
BER=10 -93.5 -90.0 -86.5 -83.5 -81.5 -79.0 -75.5 -72.5 -69.5 -65.5
14
BER=10-10 -91.5 -88.0 -84.5 -81.5 -79.5 -77.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5 -63.5
BER=10-6 -92.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.0
20
BER=10-10 -90.0 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0 -75.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0
-6
BER=10 -90.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -79.0 -76.0 -73.0 -69.5 -67.0 -63.0
28
-10
BER=10 -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -77.0 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5 -65.0 -61.0
BER=10-6 -90.0 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.5 -75.5 -72.5 -69.0 -66.5 -62.5
30
-10
BER=10 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.5 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0 -64.5 -60.5
BER=10-6 -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.0 -65.5 -61.0
40
BER=10-10 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -59.0
-6
BER=10 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0 -64.5 -60.0
50
BER=10-10 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0
BER=10-6 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -75.5 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5 -64.0 -59.5
56
-10
18 BER=10 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -57.5
Physical Mode
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
BER=10-6 -92.5 -90.0 -86.5 -83.5 -81.5 -79.0 -75.5 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5
7
-10
BER=10 -90.5 -88.0 -84.5 -81.5 -79.5 -77.0 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5
BER=10-6 -91.5 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -64.5
10
BER=10-10 -89.5 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0 -75.5 -72.0 -69.5 -66.5 -62.5
-6
BER=10 -91.5 -88.0 -84.5 -81.5 -79.5 -77.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5 -63.5
14
BER=10-10 -89.5 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -77.5 -75.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.5 -61.5
BER=10-6 -90.0 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0 -75.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0
20
-10
BER=10 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.0 -73.5 -70.0 -67.0 -64.0 -60.0
BER=10-6 -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -77.0 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5 -65.0 -61.0
28
BER=10-10 -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -75.0 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -59.0
-6
BER=10 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.5 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0 -64.5 -60.5
30
BER=10-10 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.5
BER=10-6 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -89.0
40
-10
BER=10 -85.0 -81.5 -78.0 -75.0 -73.0 -70.5 -67.5 -64.0 -61.5 -57.0
BER=10-6 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0
50
BER=10-10 -84.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.0 -72.0 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0 -60.5 -56.0
-6
BER=10 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -57.5
56
-10
BER=10 -83.5 -80.0 -76.5 -73.5 -71.5 -69.0 -66.0 -62.5 -60.0 -55.5
32 MN.00273.E - 004
Radio Nominal RSL
Physical Mode
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
BER=10-6 -94.5 -92.0 -88.5 -85.5 -83.5 -81.0 -77.5 -75.0 -72.0 -68.5
7
-10
BER=10 -92.5 -90.0 -86.5 -83.5 -81.5 -79.0 -75.5 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5
BER=10-6 -93.5 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -66.5
10
BER=10-10 -91.5 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -64.5
-6
BER=10 -93.5 -90.0 -86.5 -83.5 -81.5 -79.0 -75.5 -72.5 -69.5 -65.5
14
BER=10-10 -91.5 -88.0 -84.5 -81.5 -79.5 -77.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5 -63.5
BER=10-6 -92.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.0
20
BER=10-10 -90.0 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0 -75.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0
-6
BER=10 -90.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -79.0 -76.0 -73.0 -69.5 -67.0 -63.0
28
-10
BER=10 -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -77.0 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5 -65.0 -61.0
BER=10-6 -90.0 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.5 -75.5 -72.5 -69.0 -66.5 -62.5
30
-10
BER=10 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.5 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0 -64.5 -60.5
BER=10-6 -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.0 -65.5 -61.0
40
BER=10-10 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -59.0
-6
BER=10 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0 -64.5 -60.0
50
BER=10-10 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0
BER=10-6 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -75.5 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5 -64.0 -59.5
56
-10
23 BER=10 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -57.5
Physical Mode
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
BER=10-6 -92.5 -90.0 -86.5 -83.5 -81.5 -79.0 -75.5 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5
7
-10
BER=10 -90.5 -88.0 -84.5 -81.5 -79.5 -77.0 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5
BER=10-6 -91.5 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -64.5
10
BER=10-10 -89.5 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0 -75.5 -72.0 -69.5 -66.5 -62.5
-6
BER=10 -91.5 -88.0 -84.5 -81.5 -79.5 -77.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5 -63.5
14
BER=10-10 -89.5 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -77.5 -75.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.5 -61.5
BER=10-6 -90.0 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0 -75.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0
20
-10
BER=10 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.0 -73.5 -70.0 -67.0 -64.0 -60.0
BER=10-6 -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -77.0 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5 -65.0 -61.0
28
BER=10-10 -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -75.0 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -59.0
-6
BER=10 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.5 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0 -64.5 -60.5
30
BER=10-10 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.5
BER=10-6 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -89.0
40
-10
BER=10 -85.0 -81.5 -78.0 -75.0 -73.0 -70.5 -67.5 -64.0 -61.5 -57.0
BER=10-6 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0
50
BER=10-10 -84.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.0 -72.0 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0 -60.5 -56.0
-6
BER=10 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -57.5
56
-10
BER=10 -83.5 -80.0 -76.5 -73.5 -71.5 -69.0 -66.0 -62.5 -60.0 -55.5
MN.00273.E - 004 33
Radio Nominal RSL
Physical Mode
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
BER=10-6 -93.0 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0
7
-10
BER=10 -91.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0
BER=10-6 -92.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.0
14
BER=10-10 -90.0 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0 -75.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0
-6
BER=10 -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.5 -74.5 -71.5 -68.0 -65.5 -61.5
28
BER=10-10 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.5 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -59.5
BER=10-6 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0
56
26 BER=10-10 -84.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.0 -72.0 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0 -60.5 -56.0
Physical Mode
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
BER=10-6 -91.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0
7
BER=10-10 -89.0 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0 -75.5 -72.0 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0
-6
BER=10 -90.0 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0 -75.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0
14
BER=10-10 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.0 -73.5 -70.0 -67.0 -64.0 -60.0
BER=10-6 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.5 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -59.5
28
-10
BER=10 -85.0 -81.5 -78.0 -75.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5 -64.0 -61.5 -57.5
BER=10-6 -84.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.0 -72.0 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0 -60.5 -56.0
56
BER=10-10 -82.0 -78.5 -75.0 -72.0 -70.0 -67.5 -64.5 -61.0 -58.5 -54.0
34 MN.00273.E - 004
Radio Nominal RSL
Physical Mode
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
BER=10-6 -93.5 -91.0 -87.5 -84.5 -82.5 -80.0 -76.5 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5
7
-10
BER=10 -91.5 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5
BER=10-6 -92.5 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.5 -64.5
14
BER=10-10 -90.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -78.5 -76.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.5 -62.5
-6
BER=10 -89.5 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -78.0 -75.0 -72.0 -68.5 -66.0 -62.0
28
BER=10-10 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -76.0 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5 -64.0 -60.0
BER=10-6 -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -58.5
56
28 BER=10-10 -84.5 -81.0 -77.5 -74.5 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5 -61.0 -56.5
Physical Mode
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
BER=10-6 -91.5 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5
7
BER=10-10 -89.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -78.5 -76.0 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5
-6
BER=10 -90.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -78.5 -76.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.5 -62.5
14
BER=10-10 -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -76.5 -74.0 -70.5 -67.5 -64.5 -60.5
BER=10-6 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -76.0 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5 -64.0 -60.0
28
-10
BER=10 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -58.0
BER=10-6 -84.5 -81.0 -77.5 -74.5 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5 -61.0 -56.5
56
BER=10-10 -82.5 -79.0 -75.5 -72.5 -70.5 -68.0 -65.0 -61.5 -59.0 -54.5
MN.00273.E - 004 35
Radio Nominal RSL
Physical Mode
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
BER=10-6 -92.0 -89.5 -86.0 -83.0 -81.0 -78.5 -75.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0
7
-10
BER=10 -90.0 -87.5 -84.0 -81.0 -79.0 -76.5 -73.0 -70.5 -67.5 -64.0
BER=10-6 -91.0 -88.0 -84.5 -81.5 -79.5 -77.0 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.0
10
BER=10-10 -89.0 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -77.5 -75.0 -71.5 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0
-6
BER=10 -91.0 -87.5 -84.0 -81.0 -79.0 -76.5 -73.0 -70.0 -67.0 -63.0
14
BER=10-10 -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.0 -74.5 -71.0 -68.0 -65.0 -61.0
BER=10-6 -89.5 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -77.5 -75.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.5 -61.5
20
BER=10-10 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -75.5 -73.0 -69.5 -66.5 -63.5 -59.5
-6
BER=10 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.5 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0 -64.5 -60.5
28
-10
BER=10 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.5
BER=10-6 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -76.0 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5 -64.0 -60.0
30
-10
BER=10 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -58.0
BER=10-6 -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -58.5
40
BER=10-10 -84.5 -81.0 -77.5 -74.5 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5 -61.0 -56.5
-6
BER=10 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -57.5
50
BER=10-10 -83.5 -80.0 -76.5 -73.5 -71.5 -69.0 -66.0 -62.5 -60.0 -55.5
BER=10-6 -85.0 -81.5 -78.0 -75.0 -73.0 -70.5 -67.5 -64.0 -61.5 -57.0
56
-10
32 BER=10 -83.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.0 -71.0 -68.5 -65.5 -62.0 -59.5 -55.0
Physical Mode
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
BER=10-6 -90.0 -87.5 -84.0 -81.0 -79.0 -76.5 -73.0 -70.5 -67.5 -64.0
7
-10
BER=10 -88.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.0 -74.5 -71.0 -68.5 -65.5 -62.0
BER=10-6 -89.0 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -77.5 -75.0 -71.5 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0
10
BER=10-10 -87.0 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -75.5 -73.0 -69.5 -67.0 -64.0 -60.0
-6
BER=10 -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.0 -74.5 -71.0 -68.0 -65.0 -61.0
14
BER=10-10 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.0 -72.5 -69.0 -66.0 -63.0 -59.0
BER=10-6 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -75.5 -73.5 -69.5 -66.5 -63.5 -59.5
20
-10
BER=10 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -73.5 -71.0 -67.5 -64.5 -61.5 -57.5
BER=10-6 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.5
28
BER=10-10 -84.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0 -60.5 -56.5
-6
BER=10 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -58.0
30
BER=10-10 -83.5 -80.0 -76.5 -73.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.5 -60.0 -56.0
BER=10-6 -84.5 -81.0 -77.5 -74.5 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5 -61.0 -56.5
40
-10
BER=10 -82.5 -79.0 -75.5 -72.5 -70.5 -68.0 -65.0 -61.5 -59.0 -54.5
BER=10-6 -83.5 -80.0 -76.5 -73.5 -71.5 -69.0 -66.0 -62.5 -60.0 -55.5
50
BER=10-10 -81.5 -78.0 -74.5 -71.5 -69.5 -67.0 -64.0 -60.5 -58.0 -53.5
-6
BER=10 -83.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.0 -71.0 -68.5 -65.5 -62.0 -59.5 -55.0
56
-10
BER=10 -81.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.0 -69.0 -66.5 -63.5 -60.0 -57.5 -53.0
36 MN.00273.E - 004
Radio Nominal RSL
Physical Mode
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
BER=10-6 -92.5 -90.0 -86.5 -83.5 -81.5 -79.0 -75.5 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5
7
-10
BER=10 -90.5 -88.0 -84.5 -81.5 -79.5 -77.0 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5
BER=10-6 -91.5 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -64.5
10
BER=10-10 -89.5 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0 -75.5 -72.0 -69.5 -66.5 -62.5
-6
BER=10 -91.5 -88.0 -84.5 -81.5 -79.5 -77.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5 -63.5
14
BER=10-10 -89.5 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -77.5 -75.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.5 -61.5
BER=10-6 -90.0 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0 -75.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0
20
BER=10-10 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.0 -73.5 -70.0 -67.0 -64.0 -60.0
-6
BER=10 -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -77.0 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5 -65.0 -61.0
28
-10
BER=10 -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -75.0 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -59.0
BER=10-6 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.5 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0 -64.5 -60.5
30
-10
BER=10 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.5
BER=10-6 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -59.0
40
BER=10-10 -85.0 -81.5 -78.0 -75.0 -73.0 -70.5 -67.5 -64.0 -61.5 -57.0
-6
BER=10 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0
50
BER=10-10 -84.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.0 -72.0 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0 -60.5 -56.0
BER=10-6 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -57.5
56
-10
38 BER=10 -83.5 -80.0 -76.5 -73.5 -71.5 -69.0 -66.0 -62.5 -60.0 -55.5
Physical Mode
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
BER=10-6 -90.5 -88.0 -84.5 -81.5 -79.5 -77.5 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5
7
-10
BER=10 -88.5 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -77.5 -75.0 -71.5 -69.0 -66.0 -62.5
BER=10-6 -89.5 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0 -75.5 -72.0 -69.5 -66.5 -62.5
10
BER=10-10 -87.5 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.0 -73.5 -70.0 -67.5 -64.5 -60.5
-6
BER=10 -89.5 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -77.5 -75.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.5 -61.5
14
BER=10-10 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -75.5 -73.0 -69.5 -66.5 -63.5 -59.5
BER=10-6 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.0 -73.5 -70.0 -67.0 -64.0 -60.0
20
-10
BER=10 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0 -71.5 -68.0 -65.0 -62.0 -58.0
BER=10-6 -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -75.0 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -59.0
28
BER=10-10 -84.5 -81.0 -77.5 -74.5 -73.0 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5 -61.0 -57.0
-6
BER=10 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.5
30
BER=10-10 -84.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0 -60.5 -56.5
BER=10-6 -85.0 -81.5 -78.0 -75.0 -73.0 -70.5 -67.5 -64.0 -61.5 -57.0
40
-10
BER=10 -83.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.0 -71.0 -68.5 -65.5 -62.0 -59.5 -55.0
BER=10-6 -84.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.0 -72.0 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0 -60.5 -56.0
50
BER=10-10 -82.0 -78.5 -75.0 -72.0 -70.0 -67.5 -64.5 -61.0 -58.5 -54.0
-6
BER=10 -83.5 -80.0 -76.5 -73.5 -71.5 -69.0 -66.0 -62.5 -60.0 -55.5
56
-10
BER=10 -81.5 -78.0 -74.5 -71.5 -69.5 -67.0 -64.0 -60.5 -58.0 -53.5
MN.00273.E - 004 37
Radio Nominal RSL
Physical Mode
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
BER=10-6 -91.5 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5
7
-10
BER=10 -89.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -78.5 -76.0 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5
BER=10-6 -90.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -78.5 -76.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.5 -62.5
14
BER=10-10 -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -76.5 -74.0 -70.5 -67.5 -64.5 -60.5
-6
BER=10 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -76.0 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5 -64.0 -60.0
28
BER=10-10 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -58.0
BER=10-6 -84.5 -81.0 -77.5 -74.5 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5 -61.0 -56.5
56
42 BER=10-10 -82.5 -79.0 -75.5 -72.5 -70.5 -68.0 -65.0 -61.5 -59.0 -54.5
Physical Mode
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
BER=10-6 -89.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -78.5 -76.0 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5
7
BER=10-10 -87.5 -85.0 -81.5 78.5 76.5 -74.0 -70.5 -68.0 -65.0 -61.5
-6
BER=10 -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -76.5 -74.0 -70.5 -67.5 -64.5 -60.5
14
BER=10-10 -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -74.5 -72.0 -68.5 -65.5 -62.5 -58.5
BER=10-6 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -58.0
28
-10
BER=10 -83.5 -80.0 -76.5 -73.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.5 -60.0 -56.0
BER=10-6 -82.5 -79.0 -75.5 -72.5 -70.5 -68.0 -65.0 -61.5 -59.0 54.5
56
BER=10-10 -80.5 -77.0 -73.5 -70.5 -68.5 -66.0 -63.0 -59.5 -57.0 -52.5
- Modulation 4QAM up to 1024QAM

- Number of settable RF channel depending on RF band and capacity
- Tuning frequency step 250 KHz
- Tx/Rx frequency spacing see Tab.3
- Noise figure see Tab.5
Tab.5 - Noise figure
Frequency Band (GHz) Noise Figure (dB)
6 6
7 6
11 6.5
13 6.5
15 6.5
17 8
18 7
23 7
26 8.5
38 MN.00273.E - 004
Frequency Band (GHz) Noise Figure (dB)
28 8
32 9.5
38 9
42 10
- Link ID identifier RFOH: 1 to 255
- Loop facility Baseband loop, RF loop (only for GB8xxxx)
- Spurious emissions/rejection according to ETSI
- Max RSL threshold
- without degradation -25dBm

- without distortion -22dBm
- without permanent damage -10dBm
6.2.1 Adaptive modulation
ALFOplus ODU’s implement an error free adaptive modulation algorithm to improve the system gain when
the quality of the received signal become insufficient to guarantee an error free link.
The thresholds for ACM are shown in the Tab.6.
Tab.6 - ACM switching thresholds
Power BER 10-6 Down-shift Margin Up-shift Margin Up-shift Margin

7M Physical Mode
(Estim.) (Estim.) (Estim.) (Estim.) (Estim.) (Estim.) (Estim.) (Estim.)
4SQAM 0 6.4 13.2 13.2
4QAM 0 8.2 11.2 3 17.7 5 20.2 5.0
16SQAM -2.5 12.7 15.7 3 19.6 5 19.6 7.5
16QAM -2.5 14.6 17.6 3 22.2 5 23.5 5.0
32QAM -3.75 17.2 20.2 3 24.7 5 24.5 6.3
64QAM -3.5 19.7 22.7 3 27.8 5 27.8 4.8
128QAM -3.5 22.8 25.8 3 31 5 31.6 5.0
256QAM -4.125 26 29 3 34.1 5 34.1 5.6
512QAM -4.25 29.1 32.1 3 36.8 5 36.8 5.1
1KQAM -4.25 32.3 35.3 3 4.5 4.5

10M Physical Mode
4SQAM 0 6.4 0 0 13.2 0 13.2
4QAM 0 8.2 11.2 3 17.7 5 20.2 5.0
16SQAM -2.5 12.7 15.7 3 19.6 5 19.6 7.5
16QAM -2.5 14.6 17.6 3 22.2 5 23.54 5.0
32QAM -3.75 17.2 20.2 3 24.7 5 24.5 6.3
MN.00273.E - 004 39
64QAM -3.5 19.7 22.7 3 27.8 5 27.8 4.8
128QAM -3.5 22.8 25.8 3 31 5 31.6 5.0
256QAM -4.125 26 29 3 34.1 5 34.1 5.6
512QAM -4.25 29.1 32.1 3 36.8 5 36.8 5.1
1KQAM -4.25 32.3 35.3 3 0 4.5 4.5

14M Physical Mode
4SQAM 0 5.8 13.2 13.2
4QAM 0 8.2 11.2 3 17.6 5.0 20.1 5.0
16SQAM -2.5 12.6 15.6 3 19.5 5.0 19.5 7.5
16QAM -2.5 14.5 17.5 3 22 5.0 23.3 5.0
32QAM -3.75 17 20 3 25.7 5.0 25.5 6.3
64QAM -3.5 19.7 23.2 3 27.7 6.0 27.7 5.8
128QAM -3.5 22.7 25.7 3 30.8 5.0 31.4 5.0
256QAM -4.125 25.8 28.8 3 33.9 5.0 33.9 5.6
512QAM -4.25 28.9 31.9 3 36.7 5.0 36.7 5.1
1KQAM -4.25 32.2 35.2 3 4.5 4.5

20M Physical Mode
4SQAM 0 5.7 12.7 12.7
4QAM 0 8.2 10.7 2.5 17.1 4.5 19.6 4.5
16SQAM -2.5 12.6 15.1 2.5 18.9 4.5 18.9 7.0
16QAM -2.5 14.4 16.9 2.5 21.3 4.5 22.6 4.5
32QAM -3.75 16.8 19.3 2.5 25.6 4.5 25.4 5.8
64QAM -3.5 19.6 23.1 3,5 27.2 6 27.2 5.8
128QAM -3.5 22.7 25.2 2.5 30.2 4.5 30.8 4.5
256QAM -4.125 25.7 28.2 2.5 33.3 4.5 33.3 5.1
512QAM -4.25 28.8 31.3 2.5 36.5 4.5 36.5 4.6
1KQAM -4.25 320 34.5 2.5 4.5 4.5

28M Physical Mode
4SQAM 0 5.7 12.7 12.7
4QAM 0 8.2 10.7 2.5 17.1 4.5 19.6 4.5
16SQAM -2.5 12.6 15.1 2.5 18.9 4.5 18.9 7.0
16QAM -2.5 14.4 16.9 2.5 21.3 4.5 22.6 4.5
32QAM -3.75 16.8 19.3 2.5 25.6 4.5 25.4 5.8
64QAM -3.5 19.6 23.1 3,5 27.2 6.0 27.2 5.8
128QAM -3.5 22.7 25.2 2.5 30.2 4.5 30.8 4.5
256QAM -4.125 25.7 28.2 2.5 33.3 4.5 33.3 5.1
40 MN.00273.E - 004
512QAM -4.25 28.8 31.3 2.5 36.5 4.5 36.5 4.6
1KQAM -4.25 32 34.5 2.5 4.5 4.5

30M Physical Mode
4SQAM 0 5.7 12.7 12.7
4QAM 0 8.2 10.7 2.5 17.1 4.5 19.6 4.5
16SQAM -2.5 12.6 15.1 2.5 18.9 4.5 18.9 7.0
16QAM -2.5 14.4 16.9 2.5 21.3 4.5 22.6 4.5
32QAM -3.75 16.8 19.3 2.5 25.6 4.5 25.4 5.8
64QAM -3.5 19.6 23.1 3,5 27.2 6.0 27.2 5.8
128QAM -3.5 22.7 25.2 2.5 30.2 4.5 30.8 4.5
256QAM -4.125 25.7 28.2 2.5 33.3 4.5 33.3 5.1
512QAM -4.25 28.8 31.3 2.5 36.5 4.5 36.5 4.6
1KQAM -4.25 32 34.5 2.5 4.5 4.5

40M Physical Mode
4SQAM 0 5.7 12.7 12.7
4QAM 0 8.2 10.7 2.5 17.1 4.5 19.6 4.5
16SQAM -2.5 12.6 15.1 2.5 18.9 4.5 18.9 7.0
16QAM -2.5 14.4 16.9 2.5 21.3 4.5 22.6 4.5
32QAM -3.75 16.8 19.3 2.5 24.6 4.5 24.4 5.8
64QAM -3.5 19.6 22.6 3.0 27.2 5.0 27.2 4.8
128QAM -3.5 22.7 25.2 2.5 30.2 4.5 30.8 4.5
256QAM -4.125 25.7 28.2 2.5 33.3 4.5 33.3 5.1
512QAM -4.25 28.8 31.3 2.5 36.5 4.5 36.5 4.6
1KQAM -4.25 32 34.5 2.5 4.5 4.5

50M Physical Mode
4SQAM 0 5.7 12.7 12.7
4QAM 0 8.2 10.7 2.5 17.1 4.5 19.6 4.5
16SQAM -2.5 12.6 15.1 2.5 18.9 4.5 18.9 7.0
16QAM -2.5 14.4 16.9 2.5 21.3 4.5 22.6 4.5
32QAM -3.75 16.8 19.3 2.5 24.6 4.5 24.4 5.8
64QAM -3.5 19.6 22.6 3.0 27.2 5.0 27.2 4.8
128QAM -3.5 22.7 25.2 2.5 30.2 4.5 30.8 4.5
256QAM -4.125 25.7 28.2 2.5 33.3 4.5 33.3 5.1
512QAM -4.25 28.8 31.3 2.5 36.5 4.5 36.5 4.6
1KQAM -4.25 32 34.5 2.5 4.5 4.5
MN.00273.E - 004 41
56M Physical Mode
4SQAM 0 5.7 12.7 12.7
4QAM 0 8.2 10.7 2.5 17.1 4.5 19.6 4.5
16SQAM -2.5 12.6 15.1 2.5 18.9 4.5 18.9 7.0
16QAM -2.5 14.4 16.9 2.5 21.3 4.5 22.6 4.5
32QAM -3.75 16.8 19.3 2.5 24.6 4.5 24.4 5.8
64QAM -3.5 19.6 22.6 3 27.2 5.0 27.2 4.8
128QAM -3.5 22.7 25.2 2.5 30.2 4.5 30.8 4.5
256QAM -4.125 25.7 28.2 2.5 33.3 4.5 33.3 5.1
512QAM -4.125 28.8 31.3 2.5 36.5 4.5 36.5 4.6
1KQAM -5.0 32 34.5 2.5 4.5 4.5
6.3 LINE INTERFACE CHARACTERISTICS
Ethernet interface
All ports can be “transmitters or sources” of the synchronism through Synchronous Ethernet.
- Ethernet connectors IEEE 802.3 10/100/1000BaseT RJ45

IEEE 802.3 100/1000BaseX LC
- Ethernet switch functionality MAC Switching, Learning and Ageing
Jumbo frame up to 10 kbytes
IEEE 802.3af PoE-Power Over Ethernet
IEEE 802.1Q VLAN
IEEE 802.1ad QinQ-VLAN Stacking
VLAN rewriting (Radio side)
Link Loss Forwarding (LLF)
IEEE 802.3x Flow Control
IEEE 802.1p QoS/DSCP
IEEE 802.1w RSTP-Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
ELP (Ethernet Line Protection)
IEEE 802.3ad LACP-Link Aggregation Control Protocol or Link
Aggregation
IEEE 802.1ag OAM-Operation, Administration and Maintenance
G.8264 SyncE Quality Management (SSM)
Hard limiting or WRED (Software selectable)
Enhanced Ethernet Prioritization based on MPLS “ExpBits”
Ethernet frame fragmentation (radio side)
Selective QinQ based on VLAN and 802.1p priority
CIR/EIR rate Management, based on outer Tag or input priority
(radio side)
Multi Layer Packet Compression (up to 128kbytes-configurable
radio side)
Advanced statistics monitoring based on VLAN and priority
Ethernet performance monitoring-RMON
Security management (SSH, SFTP) on network element and
NMS5UX
- Ethernet latency see Tab.7
42 MN.00273.E - 004
Tab.7 - Guaranteed Ethernet Latency (ms) for ALFOplus
One way delay (msec) Packet size 64 bytes
Channel size (MHz) 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1K QAM
7 1.100 1.083 1.069 1.064 1.060 1.056 1.054 1.051 1.049
10 0.925 0.914 0.904 0.900 0.897 0.894 0.893 0.980 0.889
14 0.649 0.641 0.634 0.632 0.629 0.627 0.626 0.625 0.624
20 0.464 0.459 0.453 0.451 0.450 0.449 0.448 0.447 0.447
28 0.329 0.325 0.321 0.320 0.319 0.318 0.318 0.317 0316
30 0.311 0.306 0.304 0.303 0.302 0.302 0.300 0.300 0.299
40 0.237 0.233 0.232 0.231 0.230 0.230 0.229 0.229 0.228
50 0.193 0.190 0.188 0.188 0.186 0.186 0.186 0.186 0.186
56 0.170 0.168 0.166 0.166 0.165 0.164 0.164 0.164 0.163
7 1.148 1.120 1.095 1.088 1.078 1.071 1.068 1.063 1.060
10 0.960 0.940 0.922 0.916 0.909 0.905 0.903 0.900 0.898
14 0.674 0.660 0.648 0.644 0.639 0.636 0.634 0.632 0.630
20 0.483 0.473 0.464 0.461 0.458 0.456 0.455 0.453 0.451
28 0.342 0.335 0.329 0.327 0.324 0.323 0.322 0.321 0.321
30 0.323 0.293 0.289 0.283 0.285 0.283 0.282 0.282 0.303
40 0.266 0.241 0.238 0.233 0.235 0.233 0.232 0.232 0.231
50 0.201 0.197 0.193 0.192 0.191 0.190 0.190 0.189 0.188
56 0.177 0.174 0.171 0.169 0.169 0.168 0.167 0.167 0.167
7 1.247 1.194 1.146 1.132 1.114 1.101 1.095 1.087 1.081
10 1.030 0.993 0.960 0.950 0.937 0.929 0.925 0.919 0.913
14 0.723 0.697 0.674 0.666 0.658 0.652 0.649 0.645 0.641
20 0.517 0.499 0.482 0.478 0.472 0.467 0.466 0.463 0.456
28 0.367 0.354 0.342 0.339 0.335 0.332 0.331 0.329 0.327
30 0.347 0.330 0.324 0.321 0.317 0.313 0.303 0.310 0.309
40 0.266 0.253 0.248 0.246 0.243 0.240 0.232 0.238 0.237
50 0.216 0.209 0.203 0.200 0.198 0.196 0.196 0.195 0.193
56 0.191 0.185 0.179 0.177 0.175 0.173 0.172 0.172 0.171
7 1.438 1.338 1.247 1.218 1.185 1.163 1.151 1.133 1.124
MN.00273.E - 004 43
10 1.167 1.096 1.032 1.013 0.989 0.973 0.965 0.952 0.944
14 0.820 0.770 0.725 0.712 0.695 0.684 0.678 0.669 0.664
20 0.587 0.553 0.521 0.511 0.499 0.492 0.488 0.482 0.478
28 0.418 0.393 0.371 0.364 0.356 0.350 0.347 0.343 0.341
30 0.394 0.364 0.351 0.343 0.336 0.330 0.328 0.325 0.323
40 0.303 0.280 0.270 0.264 0.258 0.254 0.252 0.250 0.247
50 0.246 0.233 0.220 0.216 0.212 0.209 0.207 0.205 0.203
56 0.218 0.206 0.195 0.191 0.187 0.185 0.183 0.181 0.179
7 1.824 1.628 1.450 1.395 1.329 1.284 1.261 1.228 1.208
10 1.443 1.305 1.181 1.143 1.096 1.065 1.049 1.026 1.007
14 1.014 0.917 0.830 0.803 0.770 0.748 0.737 0.721 0.711
20 0.726 0.658 0.597 0.579 0.556 0.540 0.532 0.521 0.513
28 0.519 0.470 0.426 0.414 0.397 0.386 0.380 0.372 0.368
30 0.489 0.432 0.405 0.392 0.377 0.368 0.360 0.363 0.348
40 0.376 0.332 0.311 0.301 0.290 0.283 0.277 0.279 0.269
50 0.307 0.280 0.256 0.248 0.239 0.233 0.229 0.225 0.221
56 0.272 0.248 0.227 0.220 0.212 0.206 0.203 0.200 0.197
7 2.193 1.905 1.644 1.562 1.466 1.400 1.367 0.001 1.289
10 1.707 1.505 1.322 1.265 1.197 1.151 1.127 1.092 1.066
14 1.200 1.058 0.929 0.890 0.842 0.809 0.792 0.768 0.754
20 0.860 0.761 0.671 0.643 0.609 0.588 0.576 0.559 0.545
28 0.615 0.544 0.480 0.460 0.436 0.420 0.412 0.399 0.393
30 0.580 0.499 0.460 0.441 0.419 0.403 0.393 0.385 0.372
40 0.433 0.381 0.351 0.337 0.320 0.308 0.300 0.294 0.289
50 0.365 0.325 0.288 0.277 0.264 0.255 0.250 0.246 0.239
56 0.324 0.289 0.257 0.247 0.235 0.227 0.223 0.219 0.214
7 8.570 6.698 5.001 4.471 3.844 3.417 3.196 2.874 2.692
10 6.271 4.959 3.769 3.399 2.958 2.659 2.505 2.280 2.101
14 4.418 3.493 2.655 2.394 2.084 1.873 1.764 1.606 1.516
20 3.171 2.532 1.953 1.773 1.559 1.414 1.338 1.228 1.123
44 MN.00273.E - 004
28 2.284 1.824 1.407 1.277 1.123 1.018 0.964 0.885 0.840
30 2.155 1.608 1.352 1.234 1.093 0.996 0.928 0.875 0.801
40 1.670 1.246 1.048 0.956 0.847 0.772 0.719 0.678 0.646
50 1.371 1.114 0.881 0.809 0.722 0.664 0.634 0.590 0.552
56 1.227 0.997 0.789 0.724 0.646 0.594 0.567 0.528 0.505
- Guaranteed Ethernet throughput see Tab.8
Tab.8 - Guaranteed Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s) for ALFOplus without Ethernet compression
Radio Net Throughput (Mbps)
Channel spacing 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1K QAM
7 MHz 9.295 10.872 16.225 21.080 24.483 30.293 36.102 41.912 47.763 53.572
10 MHz 11.408 15.328 22.875 29.720 34.517 42.707 50.898 29.088 67.279 75.469
14 MHz 16.393 22.025 32.870 42.705 49.599 61.368 73.137 84.906 96.756 108.529
20 MHz 23.231 31.213 46.581 60.520 70.289 86.968 103.647 120.326 137.004 153.683
28 MHz 32.956 44.279 66.081 85.854 99.713 123.373 147.034 170.694 194.524 218.185
30 MHz 35.117 47.183 70.414 91.484 106.251 131.463 156.675 181.887 207.100 232.312
40 MHz 46.462 62.426 93.163 121.040 140.578 173.936 207.294 240.651 274.009 307.366
50 MHz 58.078 78.033 116.454 151.300 175.723 217.420 259.117 300.814 342.511 384.208
56 MHz 65.912 88.558 132.161 171.708 199.425 246.746 294.068 341.389 389.048 436.369
MN.00273.E - 004 45
6.3.1 Ethernet optical interface characteristics
The optical interface can be specialized for the different applications by insertion of the proper transceiver
on the unit.
Tab.9 - Interface characteristics
Gigabit 100 Mbit/s
Parameter Single Mode Multi Mode Multi Mode
9/125 µm 50/125 µm 62.5/125 µm 50/125 µm 62.5/125 µm
Operating Distance up to 10km up to 550m up to 2km
Optical Center Wavelength 1310 nm 850 nm 1310 nm
Optical Transmit Power -3 ÷ -9.5 dBm -2 ÷ -9.5 dBm -14 ÷ -22 dBm
Receive Sensitivity -19 dBm -17 dBm -29 dBm
Average Receive Power

-3 dBm 0 dBm -14 dBm
Max
Link Power Budget 9.5 dB 7.5 dB 7 dB
1000BaseLX 1000BaseSX 1000BaseFX IEEE 802.3z

Compliance
IEEE 802.3z IEEE 802.3z 100BaseFx IEEE 802.3z
Transceiver Type Pluggable
Connectors Type LC
6.4 POWER SUPPLY AND CABLE
ALFOplus unit is compatible with standard POE + IEEE 802.at (with exceeding maximum power). Power
supply can be provided at the LAN1 (ALFOplus GE) or LAN2 (ALFOplus GO).
In case of external PoE injector, verify that it has overcurrent protection. Power supply can be provided at
the LAN interface or at an auxiliary separated connector at the same time. The maximum length of CAT5e
cable (that carries data+PoE) is 100m.
- Operating voltage range 48Vdc ±15%

2
- Power consumption see Tab.10
Tab.10 - Power consumption (W)
Power consumption (W)
Frequency band Typical Guaranteed
6 t.b.d. t.b.d.
7 37 39
8 37 39
11 35 37
2 Power consumption with negligible cable length.
46 MN.00273.E - 004
Power consumption (W)
Frequency band Typical Guaranteed
13 37 39
15 37 39
17 37 39
18 33.5 35
23 33.5 35
26 t.b.d. t.b.d.
32 t.b.d. t.b.d.
38 34 36
42 t.b.d. t.b.d.
In any case, for other different needs, a dedicated auxiliary port (5 pin connector) provides power supply
48Volt (see Fig.56). For installation, please use rugged and waterproof cable.
6.4.1 PoE injector
Tab.11 - PoE injector supported
Code Description
S03653 AC/DC 60W PoE injector
S03654 DC/DC 75W PoE injector
6.4.1.1 PoE injector functionality
The equipment presented in this paragraph is a SIAE IDU that provides power to the ODU ALFOplus
through the LAN cable.
SIAE Passive PoE Injector is a complete power management hot-swap with alarm indicators (over-current
protection, excess-voltage and under-voltage lockout). The Ethernet traffic from “DATA” connector (input)
is overlaid with power supply 48Volt into “DATA&Power” connector (Output). Below the details:
MN.00273.E - 004 47
Fig.11 - C60507 (48Vin 2 ports PoE injector)
Fig.12 - C60506 (48Vin 4 ports PoE injector)
6.4.1.2 Code table
Tab.12 - Code Table
Description Code
48 Vin 1 ports PoE injector C60507
48Vin 4 ports PoE injector C60506
48 MN.00273.E - 004
6.4.1.3 Electrical characteristics
Tab.13 - Electrical characteristics
Vin 36..72Vdc (floating/pos. GND)
Iin (without ODU) 60mA (C60507), 120mA (C60506)
Alarm cable open on Iout=50mA ±20%
Alarm cable open off Iout=70mA ±20%
Iout MAX (per port) 1.45A ±10%
Inrush current ETS 300 132-2 mask compliant
Surge protection IEC 1000-4-5 Level 4 4KV compliant
6.4.1.4 Connectors
Tab.14 - Connectors
Power supply 3 contacts plug P.3.81
ODU RJ45
Default polarity RJ45 V+(4.5) V-(7.8)
Optional polarity RJ45 V+(3.6) V-(1.2)
6.4.1.5 Description of alarms
Tab.15 - Description of alarms
Alarm LED (yellow) Power LED (green) Meaning
On On Cable open
Off On Remote Power supply is OK
Blinking Off Cable short circuit
Fig.13 - PoE injector interface
MN.00273.E - 004 49
6.5 WAVEGUIDE FLANGE
- Type see Tab.16
Tab.16 - Type
Frequency band Type
6 UDR 70
7 UBR 84
8 UBR 84
11 UBR 100
13 UDR 120
15 UDR 140
18 UBR 220
23 UBR 220
26 UBR 220
32 UBR 320
38 UBR 320
42 UBR 500
- Maximum length see.Tab.17
Tab.17 - Maximum length
Waveguide maximum length
Channel spacing (m)
7 MHz 10
14 MHz 10
28 MHz 10
40 MHz 5
56 MHz 5
50 MN.00273.E - 004
6.6 MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Physical size of system components:
Tab.18 - ODU dimension
Width (mm) Height (mm) Depth (mm)
ALFOplus 256 256 114
Weight of system components:

- ALFOplus < 4.5 kg
6.7 SURGE AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION
- Protection method: gas dischargers
- Gas discharger technical characteristics
- DC spark-over voltage 150V +/-20%

- Nominal impulse discharge
current (wave 8/20 µs) 20kA
- Single impulse discharge

current (wave 8/20 µs) 25kA
- Operation and storage temperature -40°C ÷ +90°C
- Performances in accordance to EN 301 489
6.8 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
- Operating temperature range –33°C ÷ +55°C
- Survival temperature range (reduce MTBF) -40°C ÷ +70°C
- Operational humidity weatherproof according to IP65 environmental

class
- Thermal resistance thermal resistance 0.5°C/W

- Solar heat gain not exceeding 5°C
- Wind resistance 150 km/h (in operation)

200 km/h (survival)
Solar shield on the ODU guarantees an additional protection against temperature increase.
MN.00273.E - 004 51
7 EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
7.1 GENERAL
SIAE ALFOplus is a radio system for digital link in full outdoor mechanics.
ALFOplus (Access Link Full Outdoor) microwave radio system is available in various frequency ranges from
6 to 42 GHz.
The Outdoor Unit can be easily installed and configured owing to its:
• reduced size
• easily orientable antenna
• broad operating temperature range

• high flexibility of line interfaces selection
• low consumption.
The first description given in the following first concerns the circuitry common to all the versions, then that
of the line interfaces will follow.
7.1.1 Block diagram
The ALFOplus consists of two PCB housed in a small size aluminium cabinet:
• BBP-GE (Baseband processor Gigabit electrical)

• TRx (IF and RF transceiver)
or
• BBP-GO (Baseband processor Gigabit optical)

• TRx (IF and RF transceiver)
The description that follows (see Fig.14 and Fig.15) details the block diagrams of electrical and optical ver-
sion.
52 MN.00273.E - 004
.
MN.00273.E - 004
CONN LO
Ge LAN2 Surge protection RAM
& magnetics
DA Filter
MOD
2xSync
DA Filter
SWD GMII FPGA
GMII
PW
Surge protection,
Ge LAN1
magnetics,
QSPI
Poe splitter ADC
MII
ADC °C
Aux Pwr Supply
PWM
Fig.14 - ALFOplus GE
Microcontroller
LO
Main DC/DC,
Aux DC/DC ADC Vga Filter Down converter,
DEM
RAM SSD Filter Agc
ADC Vga
BBP: base band processor

TRX: IF and RF transceiver
53
54
Ge LAN1 (SFP 1000BaseX) RAM CONN. LO
DAC Filter
MOD
GMII DAC Filter
Surge GMII FPGA
Ge LAN2 protection, SWD GMII
magnetics, PHY PWM
PoE splitter
QSPI
ADC
MII
ADC °C
Aux Pwr Supply
PWM
Fig.15 - ALFOplus GO
Microcontroller
LO
Main DC/DC,
Aux DC/DC ADC Vga Filter Down converter,
DEM
RAM SSD ADC Vga Filter Agc
BBP: base band processor TRX: IF and RF transceiver
MN.00273.E - 004
7.1.2 Baseband processor
The baseband Processor (BBP) carries out the following operations:
• primary and secondary power supply
• line interfaces and protections
• baseband circuits and packets processing
• I and Q signals generation and sampling
• I, Q demodulator
• Rx baseband filtering
• Actuators and measurement points for TRx unit
• FPGA debug connector
• FPGA
• Controller
BBP unit is different depending on the interface type (electrical or optical).
7.1.2.1 Firmware
Equipment software permits to control and manage all the equipment functionality and it is distributed on
two hardware levels: main controller and ODU peripheral controllers.
Firmware can be updated through the Web Lct and it is stored in two different memory benches: one con-
taining the running firmware and the other the stand-by firmware. This permits to download a new firm-
ware release to the stand-by bench without cutting the traffic. Use “Bench Switch” to activate the bench
in stand-by (SW restart will be performed).
7.1.2.2 Web Lct
The Web Lct is a web interface software already present in the ALFOPlus, which requires Adobe Flash Player
and allows the configuration and the management of the local radio, using LAN Port Management. When
the remote one is configured properly, the whole link can be managed. WEB Lct runs on any browser (In-
ternet Explorer, Firefox etc....). Web Lct console is a free software downloadable from the site www.siae-
mic.com after registration.
In order to transfer data, “WebLCT console” or “SCT” running is necessary.
7.1.2.3 Alarm system
There are two ways of processing the alarms:
• through LEDs
• through SCT/WebLCT
Alarm associated to ALFOplus can be classified in different groups. Names and composition of these groups
as well as association between alarm classes and relay contact can be defined by the customer.
Alarms are divided into 4 severity levels according to the effects that an alarm might cause to the regular
operation of the unit detecting it. Levels are prioritised as follows:
• Critical (red): out-of-service. hw failure. urgent alarm
• Major (orange): loss of signal, minimum residual functionality, urgent alarm
• minor (yellow): failure neither urgent, high residual functionality, not urgent alarm
• warning (light blue): indication or wrong configuration, not urgent alarm
• none (green): no alarm or masked alarm
MN.00273.E - 004 55
Critical and Major alarms indicate impossibility of executing a service, hence the faulty units needs to be
serviced. Minor level represents the not urgent alarms which do not prejudice service continuity. Warning
level indicates malfunctions that might be locally removed without having to replace the unit.
Alarm classification can be modified via SCT/WebLCT operator. A short description is given for each alarm
in “Alarms” section with relevant class.
The visual indication is given by a LED, which can be green or red. The information provided are:
• Red light:
- ON - An internal alarm is active. Connect the PC for troubleshooting
- Flashing - An external alarm is active
• Green light:
- Flashing - No radio connection with far-end terminal
- ON - Radio connection with far-end terminal is active
During the power-up follows three status of display Led (see Tab.19)
Tab.19 - bootstrap status display
2nd step - Loading We- 3rd step - Ready to

Led 1st step - boot strap
bLCT management
Green OFF OFF OFF/BLINKING
Red OFF ON OFF/BLINKING
Orange ON OFF OFF
7.1.3 TRX Transceiver unit
TRX Transceiver consists of the following functional blocks:
• power supply dedicated to microwave circuits

• Tx baseband filtering
• I, Q modulator
• frequency synthesizer
• microwave transmitter and receiver
• IF devices on Rx side
7.1.4 Switch for Ethernet ports
Inside ALFOplus is present an Ethernet switch with 2 external ports line side (electrical 10/100/1000BaseT
or optical 100/1000BaseFX), one internal radio port and one port towards controller (see Fig.16).
Internal port is represented by the local radio stream where through native Ethernet transport is connected
with the remote equipment.
56 MN.00273.E - 004
Microcontroller
Ethernet
packet switch
10/100BaseT Port A
LAN1 1000BaseT Radio
1+0
10/100/1000BaseT
LAN2
Fig.16 - ALFOplus block diagram
Switch function
ALFOplus can operate like a switch between two or more separated LANs with the following advantages:
• to connect two separate LANs
• to connect two LANs via radio within a complex digital network
• to keep separated the traffic into two LANs towards MAC filtering to get a total traffic greater than
the traffic in a single LAN.
By default the routing works on basis Mac Address (Layer 2), but it can be enabled on basis VLAN ID, in
Web Lct - Ethernet switch (Enh) - Common Parameters.
The operation is the following: when a LAN port receives a MAC frame, on the basis of destination address,
it decides which LAN to send it:
• if destination address is on originating LAN the frame is discarded
• if destination address is a known address (towards address learning procedure) and is present into
local address table, the frame is sent only on destination LAN (MAC switching)
• otherwise the frame is sent to all ports with the same VLAN ID (flooding).
Take account the value of Max Packet Size (byte) when “802.1Q setting” is set as DISABLE or FALLBACK
the switch adds 4 Bytes for internal S_Tag. With 802.1Q setting in SECURE (that means that packet VID
must be contained in Virtual LAN table list, otherwise the packet is discarded), no internal TAGs are added.
Ethernet Speed/Duplex function
With electrical interface, in Web Lct - Baseband - Lan, Speed/Duplex can be manually or automatically
activated as half Duplex or Full Duplex 10/100/1000Base-T, while with optical interface, Speed Duplex can
be set as Full Duplex 100/1000Base-X.
Link Loss Forwarding
Link Loss Forwarding (LLF) is an alarm status of Ethernet interface. LLF can be enabled or disabled.
If LLF is enabled, any linkdown alarm will generate the alarm status of Ethernet interface blocking any
transmission to it. LLF can be enabled for each ports.
With LLF enabled the equipment connected (routers, switches so on) can be notified that radio link is not
available and can temporarily re-route the traffic.
MN.00273.E - 004 57
MDI/MDIX cross-over
For each LAN interface, cross-over cable can be set in Web Lct - Baseband - Lan - Cable Crossover as:
• Auto - Lan recognizes automatically the connected cable type (Straight cable or Crossover cable)
• MDI (NIC) - Manual crossover wiring type T568A
• MDI-X (Switch) - Manual crossover wiring type T568B
With crossover cable it is necessary to use the same wiring format (MDI/MDI or MDI-x/MDI-x) on both
ends. In case of straight cable is the opposite (MDI/MDI-X or MDI-X/MDI).
VLAN functionality
ALFOplus works with IEEE 802.1q and 802.1p tag. Tag is made up with:
• a fixed word of 2 bytes
• 3 bits for priority according with 802.1p
• 1 fixed bit
• 12 bits VLAN identifier (VLAN ID) according with 802.1q.
Switch cross-connections are based on Vlan Configuration Table where input and output ports or only out-
put ports should be defined for any used VID. Vlan ID (VID) has a range from 1 to 4095.
Ethernet Flow Control (802.3x)
A network device asks its adjacent devices to send a pause frame because the input is faster it can process.
The protocol used for this purpose is the flow control (802.2x).
Port Based VLan
Port Based VLan (or Lan Per Port) allows to share the Ethernet traffic (Ingress or Egress) in the internal
SIAE switch.
7.1.5 Synchronisation
Into ALFOplus a synchronisation circuit, called SincE and defined by the standard G.8264, gets the syn-
chronisation signal from the following different sources:
• LAN1
• LAN2
• radio
• Internal source
As shown in Fig.17 the clocks extracted from the sources are sent to a selection circuit that chooses one
of the signals depending on the control sent by a selection logic.
This latter acts on the base of alarm roots (Synch Loss, Synch Drift, Holdover Freerunning), on the base
of assigned priority, manual forcing and preferential switch.
The selected clock drives an oscillator through a PLL circuit. The oscillator will generate the required syn-
chronisation for the frame generation. If no input signals are available the internal oscillator source is used
for the local restart.
58 MN.00273.E - 004
Alarms
Synchronisation Clock Selector Sync Loss
Source
Sync Drift
Status
TE LAN-1
TE LAN-2
T0 Reference
T2 Radio Clk PLL
Circuit
Internal Clock
Selection Logical
Force Switch
Priority Control
Preferential Switch
Fig.17 - Synchronisation block diagram
7.1.6 Adaptive code modulation
ACM profiles
In ALFOplus radio family uses Adaptive Code and Modulation (ACM) in order to employ the correct modu-
lation profile depending on the Rx signal quality.
Available ACM profiles are the following:
• 4QAM strong
• 4QAM
• 16QAM strong
• 16QAM
• 32QAM
• 64QAM
• 128QAM
• 256QAM
• 512QAM
• 1024QAM (optional).
MN.00273.E - 004 59
These profiles operate in an RF channel with the following bandwidth:
• 7 MHz
• 14 MHz
• 28 MHz
• 56 MHz
• 112 MHz (optional).
ACM switching
The usage of the previous modulation profiles in a fixed channel bandwidth results in a variable capacity.
The criteria defining the necessity of an ACM switching, upshift or downshift, is the Rx S/N ratio.
• Upshift - When there is an increase of received S/N, within the same Channel Spacing, the modu-
lation complexity is increased in the direction from 4QAM strong to 1024QAM increasing the spectral
efficiency
• Downshift - When there is a decrease of received S/N, within the same Channel Spacing, the mod-
ulation is reduced in the direction from 1024QAM to 4QAM strong reducing the spectral efficiency,
In order to configure properly the radio link using ACM facility, an optimization must be found between
max traffic during good propagation conditions and max availability during bad propagation conditions. To
obtain this purpose the ACM in ALFOplus family can be configured via software setting the following pa-
rameters: ACM setting and Tx Power mode.
ACM setting
The ACM can vary modulation profiles between two extremes defined by the operator through software
configuration: Upper Modulation and Lower Modulation.
• Upper modulation - When propagation into the given radio channel is in the better condition (high
Rx S/N), the radio link is working at the maximum throughput defined at Upper Modulation: the
highest modulation profile that ACM can employ
• Lower modulation - When propagation into the given radio channel is in the worst condition (low
Rx S/N), the radio link is working at the minimum throughput, defined at Lower Modulation: the
lowest modulation profile that ACM can employ
Tx Power Ramp
Tx Power Ramp function permits to set Tx power according to the available modulation profiles.
• Tx Power Ramp Disabled - Tx power is the same at any modulation profile
• Tx Power Ramp Enabled - Maximum Tx power based on the reference modulation
The Tx Power Ramp is set depending on the modulation license of the user and depending on the Lower
Modulation that has been set.
7.1.7 ATPC and ACM interaction
The Automatic Transmission Power Control (ATPC) regulates the RF output power of the local transmitter
depending on the value of the RF level at the remote terminal. This value has to be preset from the local
terminal as threshold high and low. The difference between the two thresholds must be equal or higher
than 3 dB.
As soon as the received level crosses the preset threshold level low due to the increase of the hop atten-
uation, a microprocessor (µP), embedded in the ALFOplus, at the receiver side of the remote terminal
sends back to the local terminal a control to increase the transmitted power.
60 MN.00273.E - 004
A good set of the thresholds is to put the ATPC Low Level threshold higher (or even slightly higher) than
the threshold of the highest modulation scheme of the ACM; this way, the ATPC start to work before than
the received signal is reduced and by consequence will force the system to downgrade the modulation. The
behaviour of the system is to always try to increase the PTX and so the System Gain, before than being
forced to reduce capacity due to modulation downgrade.
Resuming, the correct setting of the thresholds is when the two windows, the ATPC one and the ACM one,
are not overlapped, as per Fig.18.
Local Remote
Remote PRx
dBm Tx Rx
PTx actuation PRx recording

level
µP µP
PTx control
Thresh High
Transmission
Rx Tx
Thresh Low of PTx control
Threshold
highest ACM
profile
ACM
range
Hop attenuation (dB)

Local PTx
dBm
PTx max.
ATPC range
PTx min.
Hop attenuation (dB)
Fig.18 - ATPC diagram
MN.00273.E - 004 61
7.2 LOOPS
To control the equipment correct operation a set of local and remote loops are made available. The com-
mands are forwarded by the WEBLCT program. The available loop facilities are:
• Line Loop (Ethernet Port Loop)

• Baseband loop
• RF loop (only for GB8xxxx)
PHYSICAL ALFO Plus

ETHERNET
PORT
BBP-GE RADIO
Tx
BASE
LINE
BAND
LOOP
LOOP RF Loop
Rx
Fig.19 - Available loops
7.3 RATE LIMITING AND INGRESS FILTER POLICING
7.3.1 Rate limiting
In SIAE equipment it is possible to apply the Rate Limit, i.e. to limit the total rate passing through an in-
terface. It is possible to apply the rate limiting from 64 kbit/s up to the maximum port speed (up to 1GE).
The values that can be inserted are pre-fixed from 64 kbit up to 10Mbit (64Kb, 128kb, 256kb, 512kb, 1Mb,
2Mb, 3Mb, 4Mb, 5Mb, 6Mb, 7Mb, 8Mb and 9Mb), In the range from 10Mbit/s up to 1Gbit/s the limiting val-
ues can be chosen by the user with a 10Mbit/s step. i.e. the minimum selectable granularity is 10Mb/s.
7.3.2 Ingress filtering policy (CIR/EIR according to MEF 10.2)
SIAE equipment allows limiting the ingress traffic rate on the basis of:
• LAN port (Bandwidth profile per UNI): a different profile is defined for each LAN port (VLAN ID and
priority are not considered in this case by the rate limiting algorithm)
• VLAN (Bandwidth profile per EVC): a different profile is defined for different VLANs (priority is not
considered in this case by the rate limiting algorithm). Up to 64 VLAN can be managed with different
profiles.
• VLAN + priority (Bandwidth profile per CoS): a different profile is defined for different couples
VLAN+priorities (up to 64 different cases can be managed). In this case the packet priority is always
considered by the rate limiting algorithm. More than one priority can be included in the same band-
width profile.
62 MN.00273.E - 004
In general different criteria can be defined for each port/VLAN/priority. Up to 64 Ingress Filtering Policy
resources can be defined and each bandwidth profile defined on the basis either of LAN port, VLAN or
VLAN+priority consumes 1 of such resources.
In order to define the bandwidth profile, the following parameters must be configured:
• CIR (Committed Information rate): it is the admitted ingress rate (“green” coloured), with values
between 0 kbit/s and 1 Gbit/s
• CBS (Committed Burst Rate): it is the maximum size of the token bucket of the green packets, with
values between 0 byte and 128 kbyte.
• EIR (Excess Information Rate): it is maximum ingress rate admitted when possible (“yellow” col-
oured), with values between 0kbit/s and 1Gbit/s.
• EBS (Excess Burst Rate): it is maximum size of the token bucket of the yellow packets, with values
between 0 byte and 128 kbyte.
• CF (Coupling Flag): if enabled, the excess token (if any) charged into the green bucket are moved
into the yellow packet bucket.
Red packets, i.e. the ones exceeding the CIR+EIR rate, are automatically discarded. In other words, the
rate obtained with the sum of CIR+EIR is the maximum rate allowed to be transmitted.
The combination of CIR and EIR rates is typically referred to as PIR, or Peak Information Rate, which
represents the total burstable bandwidth sold to the customer.
According to MEF 10.2 (Metro Ethernet Forum) specifications, the “bandwidth profile” service attribute (In-
put Filter Policing), which includes some or all of the above categories, can be defined per UNI, per EVC or
per CoS identifier (CoS ID; EVC.CoS). For any given frame, however, only one such model can apply. The
service provider meets the bandwidth guarantees by reserving appropriate network resources and employ-
ing a two-rate/three-colour (trTCM) rate-limitation methodology as part of its traffic engineering policy to
ensure compliance by user traffic.
• Green = Trasmitted: CIR and CBS.
• Yellow = Low Priority (dropped in case of congestion): EIR and EBS.

• Red = Dropped: traffic exceeding EIR and EBS is dropped.
CIR (green) EIR (yellow) dropped (red)
CBS (green) EBS (yellow) dropped (red)
For any port it is possible to add a Input Filter Policy table with this selections:
• Disable
• Uni Port Based
• EVC C_Vid Based
• COS C_Vid + Priority Based
• EVC S_Vid/C_Vid Based
• COS S_Vid/C_Vid + Priority Based
According the status of 802.1q Management> 802.1q settings =
• Disable: you can select only Uni Port Based with CIR, EIR, CBS and EBS; Cf disable is ok.
• Fallback: two selections 1) EVC C_Vid Based: applied to a CVLAN C_Vid with CIR, EIR, CBS and
EBS; Cf disable is ok. 2) COS C_Vid + Priority Based: applied to a CVLAN C_Vid with priority range,
CIR, EIR, CBS and EBS; Cf disable is ok.
• Secure: two selections 1) EVC S_Vid/C_Vid Based: applied to a SVLAN S_Vid and a CVLAN C_Vid
with CIR, EIR, CBS and EBS; Cf disable is ok. 2) COS S_Vid/C_Vid + Priority Based: applied to a
SVLAN S_Vid and CVLAN C_Vid with priority range, CIR, EIR, CBS and EBS; Cf disable is ok.
Into switch there is a total of 64 instances of Input Filter Policing for all the four ports into any radio port.
Any CVID can be used into only one port.
Into same port same CVID can be reused but with different priority.
MN.00273.E - 004 63
Enhanced QoS Management
The SIAE switch scheduler provides enhanced QoS management features. Based on the ingress port (and
optionally also as a function of the VLAN-ID), there are four different modes that can be used to set the
priority of an Ethernet frame:
• Ethernet: the priority is set based on the PCP (Priority Code Point) field of the VLAN tag
(IEEE802.1p) (Native 802.1p C_Vid)
• MPLS: the priority is set based on the EXP (Experimental Bit) field of the MPLS tag (Native MPLS)
• IP: the priority is set based on the DSCP field of the either IPv4 or IPv6 (Native ToS/DSCP)
• Default: the priority is set in a static mode and its value is configurable based on the Entering LAN
interface. This Default configuration is a “Port Based” Priority with default priority value of 0 (lowest
priority). These priority values can be configured by the user within the range from 0 (lowest prior-
ity) up to 7 (higher priority). The Default mode is also used when all the other criteria are not ap-
plicable.
It is in addition possible to map the EXP quality of the MPLS label into the PCP field of the outer VLAN tag
(802.1p Rewrite with MPLS). Once the priority is assigned, the packet is sent to one of the 8 output queues.
The size of each one of the 8 queues is configurable with one value between the following seven options:
128kbit, 256kbit, 512kbit, 1024kbit, 2048kbit, 4096kbit and 8192kbit.
On the basis of the filling status of the queue, different drop-policy can be applied. In SIAE switch there
are four available policies:
• Tail drop: if the packet is arriving into a full queue, it will be discarded
• Queue drop: if a new packet is arriving into a full queue, the whole queue is emptied (with the ex-
ception of the head packet)
• RED: when a new packet is arriving into the queue it has a discarding-probability that is function of
the filling status of the queue. the relation between the probability and the queue status is defined
by means of a SW configurable curve. If the queue is full, the new packet is discarded with proba-
bility 1 (like in the Tail drop case).
• WRED: it is similar to RED, with the difference that for each queue two drop’s curves are defined.
the packet in ingress is coloured according to MEF 10.2, i.e.e according to the CIR and EIR ingress
filtering policy defined. As a consequence, WRED can be chosen only if CIR/EIR Ingress filtering pol-
icy is enabled for the ingress port. Once coloured, “red” packets are always discarded, while “green”
and “Yellow” packets are managed according to different curves.
The traffic in the queues is then emptied by means of either Strict priority or Weighted Fair Queue algo-
rithm. With the Strict Priority the highest priority takes always precedence. With WFQ the available band-
width is shared between the different priorities with configurable weights. It is in addition possible to
configure at the same time some queues as Strict Priority and the remaining as WFQ.
Going into details:
• Strict Priority: first, all the packets from the highest priority queue are transmitted, then all the
packets from the second queue, and so on.
• Weighted Fair Queueing (W.F.Q.): the packets are sent on the radio following a rule based on the
weight assigned to each Queue.
Each queue “i” with WFQ is given a weight (importance) Wi.
WFQ guarantees a minimum service rate to queue “i”
Ri = R*Wi/(W1+W2+....+Wn) [Rate of the queue i]
Where:
R = rate of the servant (capacity available on the MW link)
W i= weight of the Queue taken in consideration
Wn = weight of the last Queue with WFQ enabled
This means that the rate of the queue is a fraction of the total bandwidth that depends
on the weight assigned to the Queue.
For example if the weights are set as Fig.20.
64 MN.00273.E - 004
Fig.20 -
Means that the Serving Priority of the frames present in the queues will be:
• the packets present in the Queue 7 will be transmitted with a Race 8/35
• the packets present in the Queue 6 will be transmitted with a race 8/35
• ......
• the packets present in the Queue 0 will be transmitted with a rate 1/35.
7.4 CONGESTION AVOIDANCE
The Congestion Avoidance is a protocol that permits to discard some frames before congestion occurs.
When the queue is full there is a congestion situation, this means that the resources are not enough to
serve all the packets and there is not enough room in the queue for more storage. In this case some packet
must be dropped. The choice of the dropping policy has different effects on the network. In case of con-
gestion, the TCP/IP protocol reduces the transmitting windows and therefore the amount of traffic trans-
mitted. The TCP/IP protocol increases the transmitting window very slowly to allow the network to solve
the congestion issues.
This means that, when congestion occurs, some selective dropping has to be done.
There are different policies of dropping that can be adopted:
• Tail: in this case the last packets that come to the full queue are dropped (default configuration)
• Queue: in this case all the queue is emptied, i.e. all the packets present in the Queue are dropped
• Red: Random Early Discard: with this policy, before the Queue is full some incoming packets are
dropped randomly regardless if the frames are marked yellow or green (for more details on yellow
or green frames please refer to the paragraph 7.3.2 Ingress filtering policy (CIR/EIR according to
MEF 10.2))
• WRed: Weighted Random early Discard: with this policy, before the Queue is full some incoming
packets are dropped randomly. First are dropped the packets coloured in yellow and then are
dropped the packet coloured in green, see Fig.21.
MN.00273.E - 004 65
Fig.21 - Red curve
Once WRed is enabled the threshold of Smin Smax and Pmax for the Green and Yellow frames have to be set.
The value set the points of the curve shown in Fig.21. There are some predetermined profiles to be ena-
bled:
• Profile 1:
- Smin= 30
- Smax=60
- Pmax=10
• Profile 2:
- Smin= 20
- Smax=40
- Pmax=10
These profiles can be set for the Yellow Frames (Y) and Green Frames (G) as well. These values represent:
• Smin: represents the threshold after which the switch starts dropping packets
• Sman and Pmax: are the thresholds that makes the curve of “Drop Percentage”/”Average Queue Oc-
cupation” change. After this point the dropping packets increase rapidly.
• “Red Gentle”: after the point represented by Smax and Pmax: the Drop percentage can increase to
a 100% (RED) or can linearly increase. the choice of how to increase, directly or linearly to a 100%
is manage by disabling or enabling the RED Gentle.
• RED (Random Early Drop): no packet are dropped until Average Queue Occupation % reaches
Smin(G, Green), packets are dropped randomly until a percentage of Pmax and an Occupation %
of Smax(G) limits are reached, all packets are dropped over an Occupation % higher than Smax(G);
• RED Gentle (Enable): no packets are dropped until Average Queue Occupation % reaches Smin(G,
Green); with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smin(G) and lower than Smax(G), packets
are dropped randomly with a percentage defined by the straight line between Smin(G)/0 and
Smax(G)/Pmax(G); with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smax(G) the percentage of ran-
domly dropped packets is defined by the straight line between Smax(G)/Pmax(G) and Sgentle(G)/
100%;
• WRED (Weighted Random Early Drop): Weighted RED is a two line RED; one line for Green packets,
one line for Yellow packets; Green and Yellow are defined by CIR and EIR into Input Filtering Policy
(Lan1,2,3,4);
no green packet is dropped until Average Queue Occupation % reaches Smin(G, Green);
no yellow packet is dropped until Average Queue Occupation % reaches Smin (Y, Yellow);
with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smin(G) and lower than Smax(G) green packets are
66 MN.00273.E - 004
dropped randomly with a percentage defined by the straight line between Smin(G)/0 and Smax(G)/
Pmax(G);
with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smin(Y) and lower than Smax(Y) yellow packets are
dropped randomly with a percentage defined by the straight line between Smin(Y)/0 and Smax(Y)/
Pmax(Y);
all green packets are dropped over an Occupation % higher than Smax(G);
all packets are dropped over an Occupation % higher than Smax(Y);
• WRED Gentle (Enable): Weighted RED is a two line RED; one line for Green packets, one line for
Yellow packets; Green and Yellow are defined by CIR and EIR into Input Filtering Policy
(Lan1,2,3,4);
for Green packets no packet is dropped until Average Queue Occupation % reaches Smin(G);
with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smin(G) and lower than Smax(G) green packets are
dropped randomly with a percentage defined by the straight line between Smin(G)/0 and Smax(G)/
Pmax(G);
with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smax(G), the percentage of dropped green packets
is defined by the straight line between Smax(G)/Pmax(G) and Sgentle(G)/100%;
for Yellow packets no packet is dropped until Average Queue Occupation % reaches Smin(Y);
with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smin(Y) and lower than Smax(Y) green packets are
dropped randomly with a percentage defined by the straight line between Smin(Y)/0 and Smax(Y)/
Pmax(Y);
with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smax(Y), the percentage of dropped green packets
is defined by the straight line between Smax(Y)/Pmax(Y) and Sgentle(Y)/100%;
WRED and WRED Gentle are very efficient to get the most from the radio link available traffic avoiding the
“stop and go” behaviour (SAW trend) typical of congested TCP/IP traffic.
Warning: RED and WRED impact only TCP/IP traffic, not UDP traffic.
Ethernet Frame Fragmentation
QoS preserve High priority traffic, by giving it precedence during traffic congestions. However, in case of
real time traffic also latency and jitter are important factors. Latency is strictly related to the line speed
and usually can be managed by designing the network topology in a proper way (e.g. by limiting the max-
imum number of hops in link chains). Jitter is instead a more sensitive parameter because it depends on
the traffic conditions.
In fact, when a High priority packet has to be sent over the radio link it is scheduled on a High Priority
queue. However, before to be sent over the radio link it has to wait that the packet currently in transmis-
sion (even a Best Effort packet) will be entirely sent. This waiting time can considerably change depending
on the best effort packet size (from 64bytes to 1518 bytes of even more in case of jumbo frames). One
technique used to mitigate this phenomenon is packet fragmentation, i.e. longer frames are subdivided in
smaller fragments at Tx side. A label is added to the packet in order to number these subframes. At Rx
side the original frame is rebuilt after all the fragments are received. In this way, the maximum waiting
time for a High Priority packet is reduced to the sub-frame size (some hundreds of bytes), providing sen-
sitive benefits to the packet jitter.
The SIAE switch allows to fragment Ethernet frames with two options: 256 or 512 Bytes.
For example: in case the radio is serving a 1024Byte frame in the lowest (queue 0) and there is an incoming
frame (256 bytes) in the highest priority queue (queue 7). The packet in the highest priority should be
served first, but since the servant is busy processing the packet in the lower queues, the 256Byte frame
has to wait until the radio has processed the 1024 Byte frame, see Fig.22.
MN.00273.E - 004 67
Fig.22 - Ethernet frame fragmentation disabled
With the fragmentation enabled the time that the packet in higher queues have to wait is smaller. With
fragmentation enabled the radio divides the 1024 byte packet into 4 packets of 256 Bytes and the servant
can transmit the first frame of 256 Byte in the lower queue and then transmit the high priority traffic, re-
ducing the jitter in the network, see Fig.23.
Fig.23 - Ethernet frame fragmentation enabled
Enhanced VLAN Management
The SIAE switch provides the following enhanced VLAN management features:
• VLAN rewriting
• Selective QinQ based on VLAN and IEEE 802.1p priority
68 MN.00273.E - 004
VLAN rewriting
VLAN rewriting is a feature available on radio side that allows to rewrite the VID of C-TAG of the packet
received (uplink side) or sent (downlink side) by the switch.
On uplink side (packets received on LAN interface by the switch and sent to the radio) the VID can be re-
written on the basis of the following criteria:
- LAN port + C-VID: new values of C-VID to be written into the packet can be configured on the basis
of its original C-VID and the LAN port where it has been received.
- LAN port + C-VID + priority: new values of C-VID to be written into the packet can be configured
on the basis of its original C-VID + priority and the LAN port where it has been received.
On uplink side it is possible to configure for all the LAN ports up to 64 LAN port + C-VID or LAN port + C-
VID + priority criteria.
On downlink side (packets received on radio side and sent by the switch on the LAN interface):
• the VID can be rewritten on the basis of the C-VID of the received packet. I.e., new values of C-
VID to be written into the packet can be configured on the basis of its original C_VID. It is possible
to configure up to 64 C-VID criteria in downlink, independently by the uplink configuration.
• C-VID can be removed selectively. It is possible to select the C-VID, enable the option “Removed”
and select the Output interface. In other words on downlink side it is possible to select the C-VID
to be remove and the correspondent Output LAN.
Selective QinQ based on VLAN and IEEE 802.1p priority
VLAN staking (also named QinQ) is a feature that allows an Ethernet frame to include more than one IEEE
802.1Q TAG. The scope of VLAN staking is to differentiate the traffic at different levels when the packets
must cross networks managed by different entities.
The SIAE switch radio supports the Vlan staking. Once a packet enters into the radio it is possible to add
a new IEEE 802.1Q TAG. The VID of the new TAG can be set based on different criteria:
- Ingress port of the packet

- C-VID and priority of the packet when received on the ingress port
The new TAG is added to the packet as a S-TAG. The Ethertype field of the TAG can be set either to stand-
ard values (0x88A8, 0x9100, 0x9200, 0x9300) or to any other custom values.
Packet Compression
The SIAE switch provides header packet compression. This feature allows to compress the packet header
by transmitting over the radio link proprietary labels in place of long and repetitive header field.
Multi-layer Packet Compression supports the following protocols: Ethernet, MPLS, IPv4/IPv6, UDP and RTP
and LTE S1 interface tunnelling. This latter cover the case of LTE eNodeB backhauling on S1 interface,
where the eUE traffic (either IPv4 or IPv6) is enveloped into a GTP-U tunnel. The Header compressed in
this case includes (IPv4+UDP+GTP-U of the S1 interface)+(IPv4/IPv6+UDP+RTP of the eUE traffic inserted
into the tunnel).
When enabled, the user can select which header have to be compressed considering the following maxi-
mum limits:
• the total header field size cannot exceed 124 bytes
• the total header field size after internal coding cannot exceed 118 bytes. the internal coding is re-
quired by SIAE switch in order to perform the compression task.
In Fig.24 are detailed the different header fields that can be selected with their weight in terms of header
field size and header field size after internal coding.
MN.00273.E - 004 69
Header field
Header
size after
field size
internal coding
(Bytes)
(Bytes)
! Ethernet +14 +12.5
! C-TAG (802.1Q) +4 +2
! Q-in-Q (802.1ad) - -
+(4*n) +(2*n)
Max number of S-TAG (from 1 to 2) (default=1)
! MPLS - -
+(4*n) +(4*n)
Max number of MPLS labels (from 1 to 3), PW included (default=1)
! Control Word (RFC4385) +4 +3.5
! IP+ - -
IPv4 only (default) +20 +19.5
IPv4 or IPv6 +40 +39.5
+8 +8
! UDP
! RTP
+12 +12
+100 +99
Tunneling OPv4 - IPv4/IPv6(IPv4+UDP+GTP-U+IPv4/IPv6+UDP+RTP)
Fig.24 - Header compression
LAG - Link Aggregation (IEEE 802.3ad)
Link Aggregation (LAG) is a feature available on SIAE switch that allows assigning up to 4 physical links
to one logical link (trunk) that functions as a single, higher-speed Ethernet link.
SIAE switch support IEEE802.3ad LAPC (Link Aggregation Control Protocol). LACP allows a network device
to negotiate an automatic bundling of links by sending LACP packets to the peer (directly connected device
that also implements LACP). In addition to the increased capacity and/or protection line of the logical link
and/or protection line, LACP provides additional advantages:
• Failover detection when a link fails, allowing for a trunk reconfiguration in order to avoid systematic
packet loss (after the reconfiguration the packets will be lost only if the throughput exceed the trunk
capacity)
70 MN.00273.E - 004
• it introduces an agreement between the two LACP peers before the staring of data transmission over
the trunk. This prevent anomalous behaviour in case of cabling or configuration mistakes.
LACP works by sending frames (LACPDUs) over the links belonging to the trunk. Also the equipment de-
ployed on the other end of the trunk will send LACP frames over the same links: this enables the two units
to establish the trunk. LACP can be configured two modes: active or passive. In active mode it will always
send frames along the configured links. However, in passive mode it acts as “speak when spoken to” and
therefore it can be used as a way of controlling accidental loops (as long as the other device is in active
mode). SIAE switch implements an “active” LACP.
A Line Trunk can aggregate up to 2 LAN interfaces with the following restrictions:
• all the LAN interfaces must be defined with the same speed (either 10, 100 or 1000 Mbit/s)
• all the LAN interfaces must be set in Full Duplex mode
When a Trunk is defined on SIAE switch, the end-to-end traffic is transmitted over all the aggregated lines.
As a result, the overall capacity of the trunk can be theoretically equal to the number of aggregated lines
multiplied by the capacity of a single line. In the example of Fig.25, two full duplex - 1Gbit/s connection
are grouped into the same trunk, carrying all the capacity in transit from a radio link to another. In this
configuration, the line aggregation is used as line protection, although it can transport 2 Gbit/s capacity.
LAN1 1 Gbit/s LAN1
ALFOplus ALFOplus
LAN2 1 Gbit/s LAN2
Line
trunking
2 Gbit/s
Fig.25 - Line trunking
To enable the Link Aggregation on both interfaces (LAN1 and LAN2), select the group “Enable - Trunk1” or
“Enable - Trunk2” in Web Lct - STP/ELP trunking menu.
Line Protection through distributed ELP
ELP (Ethernet Line Protection) is a feature available on SIAE switch that allows to protect a GE interface
against cable failure or accidental disconnection. With ELP it is possible to connect a switch to another net-
work element by using two GE interfaces. Both interfaces are active but just one is enabled to forward and
receive traffic (forwarding state), while the other does not allow any traffic to pass (blocking state). If the
forwarding interface goes down, the other one passes to the forwarding state. The maximum switching
time is around 900msec. This feature does not imply the use of any protocol, but is simply based on the
status of the physical interfaces. As a consequence, no particular protocol support is required on the con-
nected equipment: it is simply required to enable the two GE interfaces.
It is recommended to disable any Spanning Tree protocol on the external equipment: this could cause long-
er traffic recovery times.
To enable the Ethernet Line Protection on both interfaces (LAN1 and LAN2), select the group “Enable -
Prot1” or “Enable - Prot2” in Web Lct - STP/ELP trunking menu.
MN.00273.E - 004 71
7.5 ETHERNET OAM (OPERATION ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTE-
NANCE)
This protocol can be used in any point-to-point Ethernet link. The aim of this protocol is to check and mon-
itor the functionality of the service that the provider guarantees on the network.
7.5.1 Service layer OAM
The Service Layer OAM fully monitors a customer End-to-End Ethernet Service. Two main standards cover
this topic, the IEEE 802.1ag and ITU-T Y.1731.
The IEEE 802.1ag provides CFM (Connectivity Fault Management) useful for detecting, isolating and re-
porting connectivity faults. The ITU-T Y.1731 Standard comprehends the CFM plus some additional fea-
tures, like RDI (Remote Defect Indicator) that allows to report back to the start of the chain the Alarm
message.
SIAE equipment support CFM according to both standards ITU-T Y.1731 and 802.1ag.
The IEEE 802.1ag and the ITU-T Y.1731 are End-to-End service, i.e. provide the tools to monitor the Ether-
net Service regardless of the layers, Network Path and operators. Since the spectrum of application can
include many applications a more hierarchical structure is needed.
The Standards define:
• Maintenance Domains (MD): these specify the Domains of operators, users and service providers.
Levels from 0 to 7 are possible depending on the type of service to be monitored. Customer Domain
is the higher which includes both ends of the Ethernet service (from one End user to the other End
user), Standard Default values for Customer Domain are 7, 6 and 5. Service Provider Domains
should have a MD lower than the Customer Domain since include the whole network except the End
Users. Standard default values for Provider Domains are 3 and 4. Operator Domains are lower than
Service Provider Domains since just a part of the network is included. Standard Default values for
operator domains are 0, 1 and 2. Here follows a picture explaining the hierarchical structure of Main-
tenance Domains.
• ALFOplus: in SIAE equipment one Maintenance Domain can be specified. At each end of the Main-
tenance Domain two MEPs (Maintenance End Point) will be specified. The MEPs are “markers” that
define the end of a domain and are in charge of originating OAM frames. In a domain also MIPs
(Maintenance Intermediate Points) can be specified. The MIPs are passive check-points. The MEPs
and MIPs configuration are discussed in details in the following points. The choice of the domain and
the Domain Label (name) is left to the user. Particular attenuation must be paid to use the same
MD label in each equipment where the MD is specified, i.e. different equipment with same value of
MD domain but different MD labels belongs to different Domains.
72 MN.00273.E - 004
CE PE PE CE
Access Operator 1 Operator 2 Access
Network Core Network Core Network Network
High Level
Customer MEP MEP
Service MEP MEP

Provider
MEP MIP MIP MEP

Operator 1
Low Level
MEP MIP MIP MEP
Operator 2
Fig.26 - Hierarchical structure of maintenance domains
• A Maintenance Association (MA) is one association which correlates the VLAN to the MD in which
the MEPs and MIPs have to be defined.
• ALFOplus: when a specified traffic needs to be monitored, then it is necessary to relay the VLAN to
a Domain and to the corresponding MEPs or MIPs through the MA. Before creating the Maintenance
Association, the VLAN, either S-VLAN or C-VLAN, has to be specified in the VLAN Table. In each
SIAE equipment it is possible to set up to 32 different MA. Particular attention must be paid to use
the same MA label in each equipment where the MA is specified, i.e. different MA labels on the same
VLAN correspond to different MA associations.
• At the Edge of a MD there are MEPs (Maintenance End Points) and in the middle there could be MIPs
(Maintenance Intermediate Points). MEPs are the units in charge of managing the CFM to correctly
monitor the status of the Ethernet service provided. MIPs are passive check-points that answer to
pollings coming from MEPs. MEPs will forward OAM messages coming from higher domains and will
discard OAM messages generated from lower domains.
• ALFOplus: Each interface can be configured as MEP, Port A interface (radio interface) included. Once
chosen the interface, depending on the network topology, the direction of the MEP has to be spec-
MN.00273.E - 004 73
ified. Two Directions are possible, MEP “ ” and MEP “ ”. With MEP “ ” configured the OAM
PDUs are sent from the interface in the direction outside the equipment, i.e. the OAM PDUs are sent
from the interface on the cable toward next equipment. With MEP “ ” configured the OAM PDUs
are sent from the interface toward the inside of the equipment and will follow the VLAN table pre-
viously configured. MEPs are distinguished from each other through a MEP ID, therefore MEPs be-
longing to same MA must have different MEP IDs. In order to configure a MIP the MA has to be
habilitated on the equipment. Up to 32 MIPs or MEPs can be configured on each equipment.
The protocols belonging to the Connectivity Fault Management implemented in SIAE equipment are listed
hereafter:
• Continuity Check Protocol: this protocol enables the sending of a periodic message (like a Heartbeat
message) which enables the other MEPs deployed in the network to distinguish the status of a vir-
tual connection. this message can only be originated by a MEP.
ALFOplus: is adjustable with 1s, 10s, 1min, 10min. These messages do not trigger any automatic
reply from the destination entity.
• LoopBack Protocol: it resembles an IP PING message; once this message is sent (e.g. MEP1 sends
a Loopback Message to MEP2). MEP2 replies to MEP1 confirming therefore the status of the connec-
tion. This is done to check the status of the connection between the MEP originating the message
and the MEP/MIP to which the message is addressed. This message can only be originated from one
MEP and can be addressed to both MEPs or MIPs.
ALFOplus: the number of Loopback Messages in SIAE equipment is adjustable from 1 to 5 consec-
utive Loopbacks. In each equipment, it is possible for each MEP to check the presence of other MEPs
in the same MA. This is done through the “Remote MEP” application which allows this acknowledge-
ment and distinguishes the other MEP through means of MEP IDs and MAC address.
• Link Trace Protocol: this protocol sends a message similar to the LoopBack protocol. Every equip-
ment that is reached by this message will answer to the sender providing its own MAC address. In
this way the sender is able to understand of which equipment the MA is composed. E.g. a MEP sends
the Link Trace Message to another MEP belonging to the same Maintenance Association. the MIPs
that are deployed in the middle of the path will forward this message and answer to the initiating
MEP with their own MAC Address. By doing so the initiating MEP knows the OAM-devices deployed
in the path and their order.
• Remote Defect Indicator: this feature allows a MEP, in presence of a fault or a defect, to send a RDI
to inform the other MEPs, belonging to the same MA, of the presence of this Defect. The advantages
of this procedure are to avoid multiple Alarms created by the same cause and to be able to check
the status of other Remote MEPs. This RDI information is reported in the Continuity Check Message.
ALFOplus: this feature is present in SIAE equipment and the presence of this alarm can be checked
as well in the Remote MEPs screen on the equipment.
7.6 ETHERNET PERFORMANCE MONITORING - RMON
RMON (Remote Monitoring) is a standard whose function is providing a set of services of statistics count,
monitoring and alarm report with reference to the activity of a LAN network.
SIAE equipment support RMONv1, first MIB, as defined in RFC2819. This MIB contains real-time LAN sta-
tistics e.g. utilization, collisions and CRC errors. These counters are managed locally into the radio equip-
ment and are defined independently for each port of the device (both LAN and Radio interfaces). SIAE
NMS systems collect periodically this data and store it into the network database. More in details, the RMON
implementation in SIAE Network Elements is classified into two groups:
• RMON – Statistics: These are the counters data collected in real time by the Network Equipment.
These data are stored in the network equipment itself and, the NMS Statistics viewer can visualize
this data with the “Refresh” button.
• RMON - History: This is managed by the NMS through the collection of the counters data from the
Network Equipment. After a periodical polling to the Network Element, the NMS collects all the data
and these data are seen as the RMON History.
74 MN.00273.E - 004
In other words, the “RMON Statistics” are the data that are collected and stored in the Network Equipment,
while the “RMON History” is an aggregation of the data collected from each network equipment and the
database is located in the NMS.
7.7 RMON COUNTERS
RMON statistics are composed by counters for each port of the device that are stored in the equipment
deployed on field.
Into the equipment it can be chosen to store the values with a sampling period that can be defined between
two values: 1 min, 15 min, or both. For each sampling period the counters values are stored into the equip-
ment. After a predefined period (polling period), all the RMON data stored by the equipment are get by the
NMS. The polling period can be either less than 4 hours (if the sampling period is 1 min) or 1 day (in case
the sampling period is 15 min). The NMS aggregates the files received to create a bigger database with
the History of the Performance Monitoring samples.
Here below are described the RMON counters available for each device interface (both LAN and radio
ports):
• DropEvents: Total number of events (frames, or whole queue contents) in which packets were
dropped by the interface due to lack of resources.
• Octets RX: Total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received by the interface.
• Pkts RX: Total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast packets, and multicast packets)
received.
• BroadcastPkts RX: Total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast ad-
dress.
• Multicast Pkts RX: Total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address.
• CRC Align Errors: Total number of packets received that had a length between 64 and the Max Pack-
et Size configured on the equipment switch (in any case not exceeding 10240 bytes) with bad Frame
Check Sequence (FCS) and an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-inte-
gral number of octets (Alignment Error).
• Undersize Pkts: Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long and were oth-
erwise well formed.
• Oversize Pkts: The number of packets received during this sampling interval that were longer than
maximum allowable length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) but were otherwise
well formed.
• Fragments: Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length and had either
a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with
a nonintegral number of octets (Alignment Error).
• Jabbers: Total number of packets received that were longer than n (parameter Max Packet Size, it
can be set to 1522, 2048 bytes or 10240 Kbytes) octets, and had either a bad Frame Check Se-
quence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number
of octets (Alignment Error).
• Collisions: The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this EthLannet segment.
• Utilization Rx: The best estimate of the mean physical layer network utilization on this interface dur-
ing this sampling interval, in hundredths of a percent. The percentage is always referred to a 1Gbit/
s port speed. So, it represents the mean RX throughput measured on the port during the sampling
period and it is expressed as a percentage of a port speed.
• Octets TX: Total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) transmitted.
• Pkts TX: Total number of packets transmitted.
• BroadcastPkts TX: Total number of good packets transmitted that were directed to the broadcast
address.
• Multicast Pkts TX: Total number of good packets transmitted that were directed to a multicast ad-
dress.
MN.00273.E - 004 75
• Utilization TX: The best estimate of the mean physical layer network utilization on this interface dur-
ing this sampling interval, in hundredths of a percent. The percentage is always referred to a 1Gbit/
s port speed. So, it represents the mean TX throughput measured on the port during the sampling
period and it is expressed as a percentage of a port speed.
All the counters described above are part of the RMON statistics and it is not possible to collect only a sub-
set of them. It is however possible to select on which equipment interface activate the RMON statistics (for
example, they can be enabled only on the radio interface). This allows reducing the total amount of PM
data, for example avoiding data collection from unused LAN interfaces. This can be done on all Payload
Interfaces (regardless if electrical or optical), the Radio interfaces are included as well.
7.8 ADVANCED STATISTIC MONITORING FOR SERVICES AND PRI-

ORITY COUNTERS
In addition to the Ethernet Counters per Port with SIAE equipment it is possible to set on the Radio interface
the RMON counters per Service (Vlan) or Priority (Queues). Differently from the previous RMON counters,
the Service and Priority counters can be activated for the following variables.
• Octets TX: Total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) transmitted.
• Pkts TX: Total number of packets transmitted.

• Octets RX: Total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received by the interface.
• Pkts RX: Total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast packets, and multicast packets)
received.
• DropEvents: Total number of events (frames) in which packets were dropped by the interface due
to lack of resources.
The Service and Priority RMON can be activated and collected from NMS (Network Management System).
The Service and Priority RMON are based on the Advanced Ethernet Counters present on the equipment
and configurable on site. This means that on site it is possible to activate the Advanced Ethernet Counters
but not the Service and Priority RMON.
In any case the NMS has higher priority in respect to the configuration inserted through Web LCT. This
means that the local operator can enable and read the active measure, but when the configuration of these
RMON is done through NMS, the local operator can only read the values of the Advanced Ethernet Counters.
It is not possible to enable the RMON for Priority and, in the same equipment, the RMON per Vlan.
7.8.1 Priority RMON
The Priority RMON are based on the internal Queue of the equipment, not on the value of the Priority; this
implies that:
• the maximum number of RMON (Priority) that can be enabled are limited to 8, i.e. the number of
the queues available in SIAE switch.
• if traffic with different priorities are listed in the same Queue, the Priority RMON will work with one
Probe on the Queue. I.e. the traffic in the same Queue is seen as “Same Priority Traffic” and the
Priority RMON counts the frames belonging to the Queue
In other words, with Priority RMON there is a probe for each queue (8 queues in SIAE switch). Each probe
counts the variables listed above (Octets TX, Pkts TX, Octets RX, Pkts RX and DropEvents).
These counters will be available only with the Minimum Polling Policy of 15 min.
76 MN.00273.E - 004
7.8.2 Service RMON
The Service RMON counters allow the equipment to track the variables listed above depending on the Ser-
vice (Vlan Tag). This type of RMON can be set only on the Radio interface.
Each equipment can be set to collect RMON up to 32 Services (Vlan Tag) and only on Customer Tag.
These counters will be available only with the Minimum Polling Policy of 15 min.
7.9 SYNCHRONISM
Network Synchronisation is a growing subject related to the network evolution from TDM to Ethernet pay-
load.
In this chapter it will be described the different features supported by SIAE switch equipment for the syn-
chronization transport. The decision of the correct source to enable and how to pass the synchronisation
signal to customer’s equipment depends on network situation which has to be evaluated case by case.
Sync
Sync
2G BTS Sync
Sync Sync
E1 TDM
ETH Reference
ALFOplus ALFOplus Ethernet/TDM
Network Clock
E1 TDM
3G NodeB
Sync
Full IP
ETH
Fig.27 - Node B and BTS synch
The main concept is to transfer the synchronization signal throughout the network deployed. This implies
that SIAE equipment will take the clock signal from the concentration points (POC) and transfer it towards
the tail sites and distribute the synchronization signal to the external equipment such as NodeBs and BTS
(see Fig.27).
ALFOplus
Input SETS Output
CK IN CK OUT
Fig.28 - SETS circuit
Going into details, this means that each SIAE equipment (represented in Fig.28) will have, at least, one
“Input” and one “Output” CK.
Input (CK IN) is/are the interface/s where the SIAE equipment get the Clock signal from, these could be
another SIAE IDU or external equipment.
Output (CK OUT) is/are the interface/s where the SIAE equipment provides the Clock Signal to, these could
be another SIAE IDU or external equipment.
MN.00273.E - 004 77
Internally to each SIAE equipment the SETS identify the input and output types of interfaces by the fol-
lowing codes:
• TE: This code represents an Ethernet interface (LAN) used as input CK
• T0: Output interface. This code represents the Internal Clock
The purpose of the above list is to list the different acronyms used by the SETS that may be present in the
configuration screens.
When the Synchronization is enabled in SIAE MW equipment, in the configuration screen, there are some
features to be used for maintenance or refined tuning of the clock propagation.
Fig.29 - Synchronisation menu
Here below are listed the different configurations to be made:
• Status Control: this is a forced status for maintenance purposes of the SETS. It can be forced in:
- “Free Running”: Independently from the synchronization signal received, the clock is locked onto
the internal clock.
- “Hold Over”: The SETS is locked into the internal clock which tries to preserve the frequency
received when the SETS was locked.
- “Locked”: in this case the SETS is locked to a source of synchronization.
• “Time” Settings: these are general setting for the synchronization
- “Hold Off Time”: Time (expressed in ms) during which the system keeps the evaluated frequen-
cy of a synchronism source become invalid (not present or degraded). At the end of the Hold
Off time, the invalid source will be rejected and the first input source having a valid signal will
be used.
- “WTR Time”: i.e. Wait-To-Restore, this is a wait time to avoid oscillations. Time (expressed in
minutes) that has to pass before allowing the selected valid input source to be actually used
within the process for the selection of T0 synchronism.
• “LTI Set Time” and “LTI Reset Time”: are controls that avoid oscillations of Alarms. When one alarm
raises up, it has to be active for at least the “LTI Set Time” and when it disappears it has to be off
for at least “LTI Reset Time”.
• “Enabled”: Enables the SSM in the equipment
78 MN.00273.E - 004
7.10 SOURCES OF SYNCHRONISM
SIAE equipment is able to select among different sources of synchronization. A priority has to be assigned
to enable each source, with a value ranging from 1 to 9 included. The priority 1 corresponds to the maxi-
mum value, while the priority 9 corresponds to the minimum value. The priority shall be used to select in
which order the different synch sources must be used. In case the Priority is set as “Disabled” the corre-
spondent interface is not used as a synchronization source.
Fig.30 - Sources of synchronisation
The selectable sources of synchronisation are listed below. For each source it is also listed in square brack-
ets the correspondent acronym used by the SETS:
• Radio Interface: it is possible to have 1 radio interfaces (1+0).
• GE Interface [TE]: to identify which LANs are the sources of synchronization they have to be chosen
under “TE LAN A” and “TE LAN B”. This implies that a maximum of 2 LAN interfaces can be set as
source of synchronization. The AGS-H reference clock can be received on any one the 4 LAN inter-
faces, independently from the fact they are electrical or optical. In order to receive the synchroni-
zation signal (and regardless of the SSM status) the GE interface has to be set as “Slave”. The
configuration choices and other details are explained in “SSM on Ethernet Interfaces”.
• Internal Clock [T0]: with the Synchronization not enabled the IDU is locked into its internal clock
In case SSM is not enabled, the equipment switches from one source of synchronization to another follow-
ing the priority scale, starting from the source set to priority 1 and scaling to the sources with higher values
of priority (i.e. lower priority level). The synch source switch occurs when the present source suffers one
of the following events:
• The source of synchronization is not physically available

• The clock deviation is bigger than 4.6 ppm (maximum deviation that the internal clock can follow).
In other words, if the LAN1 is selected as first source (priority 1) of synchronization, and the LAN2 is se-
lected as the second source (priority 2) of synchronization, the SIAE equipment will be synchronized on
the LAN1 until the cable will be physically unplugged or the LAN1 frequency and phase will be out of their
specified ranges. Once one of these events occurs, the SIAE equipment will switch the source of synchro-
nization to the second source listed. If the second source listed is unplugged or out of maximum range then
the SIAE equipment will switch to the third source and so on.
In case no other synch sources are available the SIAE equipment will go on “Internal Source”, i.e. the in-
ternal clock present in SIAE equipment. In this condition the internal clock will be kept in hold status, trying
to keep the last synchronization reference received. In these conditions, the internal clock of SIAE equip-
MN.00273.E - 004 79
ment has a reliability of 0.3 ppm over 24 h. When the SIAE equipment switches to internal clock, it prop-
agates a quality of SEC – SDH Equipment Clock.
7.11 PROVIDE SYNCHRONISM TO EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT
Once the SIAE equipment is synchronized, the clock signal has to be passed toward external equipment or
other SIAE equipment. SIAE equipment can give the synchronization signal through different interfaces.
Fig.31 - Provide synchronism
The interfaces that are available to provide synchronization to other SIAE or external equipment are:
• Radio: this interface is passing the synchronism automatically to the remote equipment. No config-
uration is needed.
• GE Interfaces: the TX CK of the all GE lines (i.e. LAN 1 and 2) is locked to the SETS. In this way,
the CK can be passed through these connections to other equipment provided that they support
Synchronous Ethernet. The GE Interfaces when used in Electrical can provide the CK signal to other
equipment: in this case the equipment port role must be “Master”. Once the synchronization is en-
abled in the SIAE equipment, automatically all the LAN interfaces are locked onto the SETS. This
implies that the synchronization signal is automatically provided onto all the LAN interfaces.
The choices of the interface to pass the clock signal depend strictly on the external equipment. This means
that in first place it is necessary to establish the possible sources of synchronization available on the ex-
ternal equipment. Depending on the availability of these sources, SIAE equipment will be configured with
the correspondent interface to pass the clock signal.
80 MN.00273.E - 004
7.12 G.8264 SSM – SYNCHRONISATION STATUS MESSAGE
The SSM is a protocol that transmits the quality of the synchronization message throughout the network
(G.781).
In the synchronization network the transmission of the quality of the clock allows the network to be scal-
able and to provide redundancy. In case of failure of SIAE equipment or cable, it is helpful to provide re-
dundancy for clock propagation in order to avoid synchronization loops.
Synchronisation loops could happen after a failure when two equipment are synchronising each other on
the same physical connection. If this happens the equipment will not present any alarm on the synchroni-
zation but will generate and propagate a not reliable clock. The quality of the clocks that are propagated
are:
• PRC: Primary reference Clock – Best quality clock reachable (Cesium Clock)
• SSUT: Synchronization Supply Unit Transit (Rubidium Clock)
• SSUL: Synchronization Supply Unit Local

• SEC: SDH Equipment Clock (Crystal Clock)
• DNU: Do not Use – This signal informs the receiver to do not use this clock
Here above are listed in order from the better quality clock (PRC – Primary Reference Clock) to the worse
quality clock (DNU – Do Not Use). The better the quality is the more time can the SIAE equipment stay in
holdover (Internal Clock) without a degradation of the payload. In other words, better is the quality, longer
can remain reliable the clock in holdover cases.
The DNU quality is always propagated on the source on which the equipment is locked for synchronization.
In this way the Loops of synchronization are easily avoided.
Unless the user forces the CK quality input/output, SIAE equipment reads the quality present in the input
interfaces. This means that, unless there is some user’s modifications, SIAE equipment propagates the
quality of the clock as it is. I.e. the output quality is the same as the input quality.
E.g.: If in the input interface (POC Site) there is a quality of SSUT of the CK signal, SIAE equipment will
pass throughout the network this synchronization signal with a quality message of SSUT.
In case the SIAE equipment is in Holdover (internal clock) it changes the quality of the synchronization to
“SEC” quality. With SSM enabled, SIAE equipment will choose the sources of the synchronization based on
the better quality received.
In general, the equipment selects the synch source with the following criteria:
• it chooses the sources with the highest quality

• if more than one source have the same quality, the one with the highest priority is selected (i.e. the
ones that have the smaller priority value, from 1 up to 9)
• in any case, if a DNU quality is received on the highest priority source, this latter is discarded and
the equipment selects an alternative source.
Example 1: if one SIAE equipment has the two following sources of synchronization, with the same priority:
a. LAN1 with quality SEC (Priority 1)
b. Radio with quality SSUT (Priority 1)

In case the sources have the same priority, the SIAE equipment will switch the source of synchroniza-
tion to the best quality, in this case (b) the Radio with SSUT quality.
Example 2: if one SIAE equipment has the two following sources of synchronization, with the different qual-
ity and different priority:
a. LAN1 with quality SEC (Priority 1)

In case the sources have different priority and quality, the SIAE equipment will switch the source of
synchronization with higher quality, in this case (b) the Radio with Priority 2 and quality SSUT. Howev-
er, if a DNU quality would be received on Radio, the IDU will switch the synch source to LAN1 interface.
Example 3: if one IDU has the two following sources of synchronization, with the same quality:
a. LAN1 with quality SSUT (Priority 1)
MN.00273.E - 004 81
In case the sources have equal quality, the SIAE equipment will switch the source of synchronization
with higher priority, in this case (a) the LAN1 with Priority 1 and quality SSUT. However, if a DNU quality
would be received on LAN1, the SIAE equipment will switch the synch source to Radio port.
The quality of the synchronism has to be enabled for each SIAE equipment and can be transported on the
following interfaces:
• On the Ethernet Interfaces through a standard protocol (according to ITU-T G.8264)
• Radio interface with Local/Remote Telemetry: Depending on the MW link configuration (1+0) the
SSM messages are passed to the remote SIAE equipment in different ways.
- 1+0 Configuration: In this case there is one Local/Remote Telemetry passing the SSM messages
Within this configuration table there are also some maintenance configurations such as:
• Forced Switch: this command allows the operator to force the SETS to lock to a predetermined
source. This command is above all other configurations. This means that the SETS will be locked
onto this source even if the cable is unplugged
• Preferential switch: In case two sources have equal priority it is possible to set a Preferential Source.
In any case the quality is the main parameter of choice, then when two sources have the same pri-
ority, the preferential source is chosen.
In relation to the SSM, it is possible to:
• Visualize the quality of the clock signal received and transmitted (Rx Quality and Tx Quality)
• Overwrite the Quality received or transmitted (Ovw Rx Qlty and Ovw Tx Quality) and the choices
are:
- PRC: Primary reference Clock – Best quality clock reachable (Cesium Clock)
- SSUT: Synchronization Supply Unit Transit (Rubidium Clock)

- SSUL: Synchronization Supply Unit Local
- SEC: SDH Equipment Clock (Crystal Clock)
- DNU: Do not Use – This signal informs the receiver to do not use this clock
The Overwrite of the Quality of the Clock is configurable by the user and simply forces in input or output
the quality.
7.12.1 SSM on Ethernet Interfaces
In order to propagate the clock signal through the Ethernet 1GE Electrical interface it is necessary to set
correctly the master and slave option for each interface. It is possible to assign the roles (Master or Slave)
statically (as set up for source LAN) or dynamically (according to Synch direction).
This because the Master interface transmits the clock to the Slave interface and in case the direction of
propagation of the clock has to be changed (line failure, insufficient quality, etc..), the master and slave
assignment has to be re-negotiated with a consequent loss of traffic. This re-negotiation implies an inter-
ruption of the traffic from 2.4 to 2.6 seconds.
SIAE equipment allows to set the role of the interfaces to “According to synch direction” (dynamic), the
flow of the propagation of the clock signal is automatically changed depending on the transferring direction
of the CK.
If the role of the interfaces is set to “As set up for source LAN” (Static), the flow of the propagation of the
clock signal is fixed (see Fig.32).
Fig.32 - LAN synchronisation method
82 MN.00273.E - 004
The other configuration present in SIAE equipment that manage the role of the LAN interfaces (Master/
Slave) is present in the main configuration of each LAN interface. Regardless if each LAN interface is set
manually as Master/Slave or with autonegotiation, the setting of dynamic or static in the SSM configuration
is privileged. In other words if the Master/Slave are set manually in the interface configuration and in the
SSM is set “According to synch direction”, if needed, the role of the LAN changes according to synch direc-
tions.
When an electrical GE interface is in Master State (despite from the fact that it comes from a “static” or
“dynamic” setting) every synchronization signal that is coming from this interface has automatically the
quality of DNU. This does not occur for optical GE or FE interfaces (Electrical and Optical), where the “Mas-
ter” and “Slave” roles are not foreseen and so the transmitting direction for the clock can be exchanged
without any port role re-negotiation.
All the Ethernet interfaces are locked on the SETS, regardless which LAN interfaces are set as sources of
synchronization. Nevertheless the “Overwrite RX Quality” and “Overwrite TX Quality” can be applied only
on the LAN interfaces used as sources of synchronization.
MN.00273.E - 004 83
84 MN.00273.E - 004
Section 3.
INSTALLATION
8 INSTALLATION OF ALFOPLUS SYSTEM
8.1 GENERAL INFORMATION TO BE READ BEFORE THE INSTALLA-

TION
The installation, maintenance or removal of antenna systems require qualified experienced personnel.
SIAE installation instructions have been written for such a personnel. Antenna system should be inspected
once a year by qualified personnel to verify proper installation, maintenance and condition of equipment.
SIAE disclaims any liability or responsibility for the results of improper or unsafe installation practices.
ALFOplus equipment is a full-outdoor IP Ethernet radio link system, for transport capacity up to 500 Mbit/
s, designed to establish LAN-LAN connections. For the details related to the actual used frequency band
refer to the label on the equipment.
The system is provided with an integrated antenna; however, in case integrated antenna is not used, it
should be connected to an antenna conforming to the requirements of ETSI EN 302 217-4-2 for the rele-
vant frequency band.
Warning This equipment makes use of non-harmonized frequency bands.
Warning Class 2 radio equipment subject to Authorisation of use. The equipment can operate only at the
frequencies authorised by the relevant National Authority.
Warning The deployment and use of this equipment shall be made in agreement with the national regula-
tion for the Protection from Exposure to Electromagnetic Field.
Warning The symbol indicates that, within the European Union, the product is subject to separate col-
lection at the product end-of-life. Do not dispose of these products as unsorted municipal waste. For more
information, please contact the relevant supplier for verifying the procedure of correct disposal.
MN.00273.E - 004 85
8.2 GENERAL
The ALFOplus radio system is made up of an outdoor unit, protected by a metallic shield.
Compliance to electromagnetic compatibility is guaranteed through the following precautionary measures:
• during the design phase

- use of protection circuits against electrical dischargers
- use of filters on the power supply input circuits against noise propagating on the power supply
wires
• during the installation phase
- use of shielded cables
- use of ground connections.

The installation phases of the whole system are described in the following paraghaphs and it must be done
only by service person suitably trained.
Attention: Remember that the whole radio link can work only if ODUs, chosen for local and remote side,
have equal subband and different Tx module (H and L).
8.3 ELECTRICAL WIRING
The electrical wiring must be done using appropriate cables thus assuring the equipment responds to the
electromagnetic compatibility standards.
The cable terminates to flying connectors which have to be connected to the corresponding connectors on
the equipment front.
Position and pin-out of the equipment connectors are available in this section.
8.4 CONNECTIONS TO THE SUPPLY MAINS
During the final installation, protect the ODU by a magneto-thermal switch (not supplied with the equip-
ment), whose characteristics must comply with the laws in force in one’s country.
The disconnection from the supply mains is made disconnecting the auxiliary connector M12P5 from the
ODU or disconnecting the LAN PoE cable.
The typical magneto thermal switch has characteristics at least 48Vdc @1.5A with overcurrent relay class
“C” or “K” tripping curve.
Seal the auxiliary power connector when the radio is powered via PoE, in order to avoid the removal of the
cover without tools.
86 MN.00273.E - 004
8.5 GROUNDING CONNECTION
Fig.33 and annexed legend show how to perform the grounding connections.
Indoor 3 4
3 4
ODU
unit
1
6 IDU 2
unit
(+) (-)
5
Station Local
ground ground
ground
rack
Legend
1. IDU grounding point, copper faston type. The cross section area of the cable used must be 4 sq.
mm. The Faston is available on the IDU both sides.
2. ODU grounding M6 bolt copper faston type. The cross section area of the cable used must be 16
sq. mm (V60052)
3. IDU–ODU interconnection cable.
4. Grounding cable (ICD00072F) kit type cable copper or copper alloy to connect the shield of inter-
connection cable.
5. Battery grounding point of IDU to be connected to earth by means of a cable with a section area
2.5 sq. mm. Length £ 10 m.
6. Grounding cords connected to a real earth internal of station. The cross section area of the cable
must be 16 sq. mm
Fig.33 - Grounding connection
8.5.1 Mounting instructions of grounding cable kit ICD00072F (univer-

sal - no tools)
Follow the procedure. See Tab.20.
MN.00273.E - 004 87
Tab.20 - Mounting Instructions
Description
Remove the cable jacket by 30mm width approximate-

ly.
Take care not to damage the copper conductor. Clean
and dry the application area.
Remove the protective film from the butyle sealing

paste.
Put the contact in position on the cable, by firmly press-
ing on the cable jacket, checking the adherence of the
butyle sealing paste. The contact is firmly positioned on
the cable jacket.
Wrap the copper mesh around the contact and outer

conductor (at least 4 revolutions).
Block the mesh terminal under the contact tooth.
Cut the exceeding mesh length.
Remove the self-agglomerating tape protective film.

Carefully wrap tight the tape around contact and cable,
following the suitable mean line.
Tape adheres remaining in position and progressively
self-agglomerates.
Connect the earthing cable.
88 MN.00273.E - 004
8.6 REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED)
• N.2 13mm torque wrench
• N.1 15 mm torque wrench
• N.1 17 mm torque wrench

• N.1 3 mm Allen wrench.
8.7 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Installation procedure proceeds according to the following steps:
• According to polarization (vertical or horizontal), assemble the antenna and support bracket.
Attention: These instructions are fully detailed in a separate manual “Antennas - Code: MN.00249.E”
depending on the type of used antenna.
• Installation of the ODU
• Installation onto the pole of the supporting bracket

• ODU grounding.
8.7.1 Standard coupling kit
The standard coupling kit is mounted on ALFOplus by means of four screws.
Coupling kit assembly procedure
See Fig.34 - Put the standard coupling kit on the ODU. Align the four holes of the coupling kit with the four
nut screws on the ODU. Insert and tighten the four screws.
8.8 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH INTEGRAT-

ED ANTENNA
8.8.1 ODU (Standard Lock)
Mounting kit 1+0 version
• Centring ring and relevant screws
• M10 bolts
• ODU with O-ring and devices for ground connection
MN.00273.E - 004 89
• Centring ring and relevant screws
• M10 bolts for hybrid and ODU mounting
• Hybrid mechanical body
• Polarization twist disk (see Fig.36)
• 2 ODUs with O-rings and devices for ground connection.
8.8.1.1 1+0 ODU with integrated antenna
Install the antenna using the antenna installation guide (specific for each antenna) inside the antenna box
provided by antenna producer. Keep attention to the polarization of the antenna feeder depending on re-
quested polarization.
After the antenna is installed onto the pole, the ODU must be installed, see Fig.35.
• Position the three holes circular flange (1) on the antenna flange and align the three holes on the
circular flange with the three relevant holes on the antenna flange
• Insert and tighten the three 3mm M4 Allen screws (2) using a 3mm Allen wrench (torque = 2 Nm)
• Screw partially the four M10 bolts (3) on the antenna back plate: each bolt should be tightened to
have the square head out of the hole of about 13-14mm (the thickness of hook, use 15mm spanner)
• Apply seal and lubricant grease Dow Corning 4 to the O-ring, protecting fingers with gloves, and
insert in the proper track on the ODU flange
• Position the ODU vertically near the four bolts on the antenna flange and align the ODU to match
the polarization of the antenna feeder:
- vertical polarization: the handle of the ODU is at the bottom left corner
- horizontal polarization: the handle of the ODU is at the bottom right corner
• After the right position has been found, rotate 30° counter clockwise the ODU and approach the
ODU to the antenna flange in order to have the four slots of the Standard Lock cross between the
four bolts
• Rotate 30° clockwise the ODU to hook each slots on the relevant bolt
• When each slot is firmly hooked on the relevant bolt, tighten each bolt (use 15mm spanner,
torque=46mm)
• Optional: sun cover kit - Insert the sun cover and tie one of its bottom holes to the ODU handle by
means of the black plastic strip included in the sun cover kit
• The ODU is ready to be connected to the grounding cable and to the LAN cable.
Attention: Leave 25 cm straight Lan cable between Amphenol connector and first bending to secure water-
proof IPx5.
8.8.1.2 1+1 ODU with integrated antenna
Install the antenna using the antenna installation guide (specific for each antenna) inside the antenna box
by antenna producer.
Keep attention to the polarization of the antenna feeder depending on requested polarization.
After the antenna has been installed onto the pole, follow the procedure below, see Fig.37
Mounting the hybrid (1) on the back of the antenna:
• Position the three holes circular flange on the antenna flange and align the holes on the circular
flange with the relevant holes on the antenna flange
• Insert and tighten the three 3mm M4 Allen screws using a 3mm Allen wrench (torque = 2mm)
90 MN.00273.E - 004
• Prepare the polarization disk (see Fig.36) with the two O-rings: seal and lubricant grease Dow Corn-
ing 4 must be applied to the O-ring, protecting fingers with gloves; each O-ring must be inserted in
the proper track on each surface of the disk
• Move the marking reference, present on the twister disk, to H or V label of the hybrid flange (an-
tenna side), to set the polarization, as shown in Fig.36 and tighten the four screws (torque value as
in Tab.21)
• Mount the hybrid on the back of the antenna tightening four M10 bolts (2) with crossed method
(first bolt on high position left, second bolt on the opposite side following the diagonal, then do the
same with the other two bolts (see Fig.37)
Mounting each ODU on the hybrid:
• screw partially four 25 mm M10 bolts positioning them in the holes (3) on the hybrid flange (ODU
side): each bolt should be tightened to have the square head out of the hole of about 13-14 mm,
use 15mm spanner
• Apply seal and lubricant grease Dow Corning 4 to the O-ring, protecting fingers with gloves and in-
sert in the proper track on the ODU flange
the polarization of the antenna feeder: horizontal polarization must be used, the handle of the OU
is at the bottom right corner
• After the right position has been found, rotate 30° counter clockwise the ODU and approach it to
the antenna flange in order to have the four slots of the Standard Lock cross between the four bolts
on the hybrid
• When each slot is firmly hooked on the relevant bolt, tighten each bolt (use 15 mm spanner, torque
= 46 Nm)
• Optional: sun cover kit - insert the sun cover and tie one of its bottom holes to the ODU handle by
means of the block plastic strip included in the sun cover kit
• Now the ODU is ready to be connected to the grounding cable and to the Lan cable
proof IPX5
• Repeat for the other ODU on the other side.
Tab.21 - Torques for tightening screws
Frequencies Screw Tool Torque
from 18 to 38 GHz Allen screw M3 Allen key 2.5 mm 1 Nm
up to 15 GHz Allen screw M4 Allen key 3 mm 1 Nm
MN.00273.E - 004 91
8.9 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH SEPARAT-
ED ANTENNA
• Diameter of the pole 60-114 mm
8.9.1 ODU (Standard Lock)
• Supporting plate, fixing bracket with M10 130mm bolts (with washer, spring and nut)
• 1 antenna side flange, variable as function of RF frequency, with relevant screws

• M10 25mm bolts for ODU mounting
• ODU with O-ring and devices for ground connection
• Supporting plate, fixing bracket with M10 130mm bolts (with washer, spring and nut)
• M10 25mm bolts for hybrid and ODUs mounting

• Hybrid mechanical body
• Polarization twist disk (see Fig.36)
• 2 ODUs with O-rings and devices for ground connection.
8.9.1.1 1+0 ODU with separated antenna
See Fig.38.
• Position the supporting plate (1) on the pole and fix the rear bracket (2) to it by means of the four
130 mm M10 bolt (3) with relevant washers, springs and nuts (use 15mm spanner, torque =
46Nm).
• Fix the antenna side flange (4) with the proper screws (in Fig.38 the antenna flange is shown in two
different positions depending on the polarization), the screw holes side is the side where the wave-
guide must be installed.
• On the supporting plate, on the opposite side respect to the antenna flange just mounted, insert in
holes (5) on the supporting plate the four 25mm M10 bolts (3): screw them partially, each bolt
should be tightened to have the square head out of the hole of about 13-14 mm (the thickness of
hook (4), use 15mm spanner).
insert it in the proper track on the ODU flange.
• Position the ODU vertically near the four bolts on the supporting plate and align the ODU to match
the polarization of the antenna flange:
- vertical polarization: the handle of the ODU is at the bottom left corner
- horizontal polarization: the handle of the ODU is at the bottom right corner
• After the right position has been found, rotate 30° counter clockwise the ODU and approach the
ODU to the supporting plate in order to have the four slots of the Standard Lock cross between the
four bolts
92 MN.00273.E - 004
=46 Nm)
• Optional: sun cover kit - Insert the sun cover and tie one of its bottom holes to the ODU handle by
• The ODU is ready to be connected to the grounding cable and to the Lan cable
proof IPX5
8.9.1.2 1+1 ODU with separated antenna
See Fig.39.
• Position the supporting plate (1) on the pole and fix the rear bracket (2) to it by means of the four
130 mm M10 bolt (3) with relevant washers, springs and nuts (use 15 mm spanner, torque = 46
Nm)
• Move the marking reference, present on the twister disk, to H or V label of the hybrid flange (an-
tenna side), to set the polarization as shown in Fig.36 and tighten the four screws (torque value as
in Tab.21)
• Mount the hybrid on the supporting plate (1), tightening four M10 bolts (5) with method cross (first
bolt on high left position, second bolt on opposite side following the diagonal, then do the same with
the other two bolts (see Fig.39)
Mounting each ODU on the hybrid:

• Screw partially four 25 mm M10 bolts positioning them in the holes (7) on the hybrid flange (ODU
side): each bolt should be tightened to have the square head out of the hole of about 13-14 mm,
use 15 mm spanner
insert in the proper track on the ODU flange
the polarization of the antenna feeder: horizontal polarization must be used, the handle of the ODU
is at the bottom right corner
• After the right position has been found, rotate 30° counter clockwise the ODU and approach it to
the antenna flange in order to have the four slots of the Standard Lock cross between the four bolts
on the hybrid
= 46 Nm)
• Optional: sun cover kit - insert the sun cover and tie one of its bottom holes to the ODU handle by
• Now the ODU is ready to be connected to the grounding cable and to the Lan cable
• Repeat for the other ODU on the other side
proof IPX5
8.9.1.3 Waveguide towards the antenna
After having installed the ODU in 1+0 configuration or in 1+1 configuration, the waveguide towards the
antenna must be installed.
• 1+0: the waveguide must be fixed to the antenna flange on the supporting plate of the ODU. In
case of flexible waveguides, an excessive folding can damage the waveguide, see Tab.22 for details.
• 1+1: the waveguide must be fixed to the hybrid. In case of flexible waveguides, an excessive folding
can damage the waveguide, see Tab.22 for details.
MN.00273.E - 004 93
8.10 GROUNDING
The ODU must be connected to ground with the available grounding bolt and eyelet terminal, making ref-
erence to details of Fig.34.
Tab.22 - Waveguide bending radius according to frequency
Bending radius with- Bending radius with- Bending radius with Bending radius with
out rebending out rebending rebending rebending
Frequency
mm (inch) mm (inch) mm (inch) mm (inch)
E-plane a H-plane b E-plane a. H-plane b.
15 GHz 130 (5,1) 280 (11,0) 150 (5,9) 300 (11,9)
18 GHz 130 (5,1) 280 (11,0) 150 (5,9) 300 (11,9)
23 GHz 110 (4,3) 230 (9,1) 130 (5,1) 250 (9,9)
38 GHz 80 (3,1) 140 (5,5) 90 (3,6) 150 (5,9)
a. Bending E-plane
Rmin/E
Bending E-plane
(short side of the section)
b. Bending H-plane
Rmin/H
Bending H-plane
(long side of the section)
94 MN.00273.E - 004
O-ring
Coupling kit
Fig.34 - ODU with standard coupling kit
MN.00273.E - 004 95
3
Fig.35 - 1+0 ODU installation
96 MN.00273.E - 004
Reference
Fig.36 - Polarization disk
MN.00273.E - 004 97
3
Fig.37 - 1+1 ODU installation
98 MN.00273.E - 004
114-60
3
Fig.38 - 1+0 antenna flange
MN.00273.E - 004 99
7
4
3
1
5
2
Fig.39 - 1+1 antenna flange
100 MN.00273.E - 004

8.11 USER CONNECTORS
ALFOplus provides an auxiliary connector and 2 types of Amphenol connector, which guarantee Ethernet
port compatibility for both version: Gigabit electrical and optical.
8.11.1 Auxiliary connector
The auxiliary 5 pin circulator connector has various functions and it is used when:
• the Power over Ethernet injector through the data Lan cable is not available or as additional power
supply source (48Vdc in 1+1 configuration)
• during the alignment of antenna (remember to enable received signal strength indicator in
Equipment menu - General preset RSSI.
It is recommended after the alignment to set RSSI as Disable not to overload CPU.
• In case of emergency, if ALFOplus IP address is unknown, connect it with serial console (F03594),
as shown in Fig.56 using hyperterminal 115200 8, N, 1 and press any button o access in the login
The available auxiliary cables already assembled:
• F03594 cable for laboratory use only (see Fig.56)
• F03608 2xM12 5P pointing cable (remove it after commissioning pointing) (see Fig.57)
Tab.23 - Auxiliary power cable
SIAE code Descriptions View
P04185 Female 5 pin M12 shielded connector
Outdoor power supply cable

M10154
2x0.75mmq for distance £ 100m
Outdoor power supply cable

M10166
2x1.5mmq for distance £ 200m
MN.00273.E - 004 101

Assembly steps for M12 male/female connector and conductor
a= slide on parts
b= strip conductor, widen shield and lay around the shielding ring, cuf off projecting mesh. Slide cores
through the housing. mount shielding ring, gasket and clamping cage. Tighten pressure screw to fix the
cable. Screw down cores. Mount male/female part. Tighten pressure screw.
Fig.40 - Functional drawing
Schematic diagram
Fig.41 - Cable connection side M12 (screw connection)
Fig.42 - Pin assignment M12 socket, 5-pos., A-coded, socket side view
102 MN.00273.E - 004

Fig.43 - Dimensioned drawing - M12 connector
Tab.24 - Pinout M12 connector
Pinout Description
1 Vdc (-) = -48 Volts
2 Vdc (+) = 0 Volts
3 Rx_Console
4 Tx_Console
5 GND_Console
Shield Ground
8.11.2 RJ45 connector
The electrical RJ45 connection to ALFOplus is guaranteed only with coded connector; do not use other mo-
dalities of connectors.
Part to be assembled (see Tab.25)
Tab.25 - Part to be assembled
SIAE code Description View
Amphenol kit RJ45 shielded full out-

P20032
door connector
M02472 Data cable CAT5e for outdoor
MN.00273.E - 004 103

SIAE code Description View
Indoor RJ45 boot protection black

M05184
F=6mm
P03192 Indoor RJ45 unshielded plug
P20051 Outdoor RJ45 shielded
1000Base-T Gigabit Ethernet cables and connectors
Please be aware that modifying Ethernet cables improperly may cause loss of network connectivity. Please
follow colours of wiring.
Fig.44 - T-568A Straight-Through Ethernet cable
104 MN.00273.E - 004

Fig.45 - RJ-45 Pinout
Fig.46 - Indoor RJ45 unshielded assembly
LAN Cable connector - P20032 - Assembly procedure for RJ sealed connectors
Procedure to be used for terminating and assembling of Amphenol Connector Kit
Fig.47
Step 1
Feed CAT cable through boot and connector housing as shown below.
MN.00273.E - 004 105

Warning: Care should be taken not to damage the rubber sealing gasket inside the rear of the connector
housing.
Fig.48
Step 2
Terminate RJ-45 connector onto CAT cable
Strip jacketing and shield as shown
Fold shield back onto jacketing. Wrap grain wire

one and a half times around the shield. Trim ex-
cess length from drain wire
Untwist pairs and arrange to desired order.

Note: it is recommended to follow TIA-568 spec-
ifications for wiring orientation
Trim conductors at an angle and insert into the
loading bar
Trim excess wire from holder

Insert prepared cable into RJ-45 Plug
106 MN.00273.E - 004

Bend strain relief to lay along cable
Crimp plug and strain relief
Fig.49
MN.00273.E - 004 107

ALIGN THE KEYS AND
PUSH
KEY ODU CONNECTOR
Fig.50 - Cable connector keys
Step 3
Insert terminated RJ-45 plug into connector housing.
While holding the connector body, pull cable through connector housing until RJ plus is near to the housing.
Align the plug latch with the connector housing keyway.
Depress Plug latch and completely insert the RJ plug into the housing.
108 MN.00273.E - 004

Fig.51 -
Step 4
Attach and tighten sealing boot using a 19mm wrench.
Recommended tightening torque is 5.5 to 6.0 (in-lbs) or 0.62 to 0.68 (N-m)
Fig.52
MN.00273.E - 004 109

Fig.53 - PO0032
110 MN.00273.E - 004

OK
NO
Fig.54 - Connector positions
Warning: Tighten all unused connectors with the appropriate cover.
MN.00273.E - 004 111

Tighten strongly LAN
connectors by hands
to ensure the
complete isola!on
P04185 (connector M12 female 5p shelded)

Outdoor LAN connector
(LAN1-LAN2) P20032
Cable M10154 (Outdoor power supply

cable 2x0.75mmq)
Fig.55
8.11.3 Optical connector
- Cable characteristics see Tab.26 and Fig.59, Fig.60, Fig.61
- Operating temperature range -40° C to +85°C
- Protection class IP67
112 MN.00273.E - 004

Tab.26 - List of Amphenol optical cable
Connector End/End Length (m) Type Mode SIAE Code
SFP LC/LC 100 Single Mode P20046
SFP LC/LC 2.5 Single Mode P20053
SFP LC/OPEN END 2.5 Single Mode P20043
SFP LC/SFP LC 2.5 Single Mode P20047
SFP LC/LC 100 Multi Mode P20037
SFP LC/LC 2.5 Multi Mode P20052
SFP LC/OPEN END 2.5 Multi Mode P20034
SFP LC/SFP LC 2.5 Multi Mode P20038
8.11.4 Optical SFP mounting procedure
Follow the instructions:

• plug the SFP module into LC embedded connectors until “Click” (see Fig.62)
• insert plugged SFP on ALFOplus optical cage (see Fig.63)
• lock the connector by turning the nut (see Fig.64).
8.11.5 Optical SFP unmounting procedure
Follow the instructions:
• unlock the connector by untightening the nut
• eject SFP module from ALFOplus Optical cage
• to unplug thr SFP from LC connector, push the locking by keeping a finger below the SFP module
(see Fig.65).
MN.00273.E - 004 113

114
THERMOFIT
PIPE
6
F03594
THERMOFIT 7 3
PIPE
COURSE
FROM TO COLOURS
4 BLACK WHITE/BROWN V- A3
2-5 3-A2 WHITE/GREEN A2

1-5 WHITE/BLUE V+ A1
8 RED BLUE
2-4
1-2 ORANGE
2-3 1-3 WHITE/ORANGE
2-2 3-A1 GREEN THERMOFIT
PIPE
2-1 3-A3 BROWN
RED 8
Fig.56 - F03594 cable for laboratory use only

BLACK 4
THERMOFIT
PIPE
MN.00273.E - 004
+20
1530 0 - GET VALUE FROM LAST DIGITS OF PART DESCRIPTION
N.B.2
MN.00273.E - 004
7
1
see N.B.
F -----
CM2 N.B.2
6
N.B.2
35 6
4 N.B.1
5
1
4 4 5
2
WIRES CONNECTION 3
3 SIDE ENLARGED VIEW
CF1
60
N.B.1 4 RED
BLACK
2
5
1
WIRES CONNECTION 4
SIDE ENLARGED VIEW 2
3
N.B. - PART MUST BE LABELLED WITH HOT TIGHTENING RING, DISPLAYING:

- PART NUMBER/REVISION;
- MANUFACTURER ID (REG. MARK OR INITIAL);
- MANUFACTURING DATE (WEEK/YEAR);
- ELECTRICAL TEST PROVEN ("TE" MARK).
N.B.1 - STRIP THE CABLE RESPECTING THE DIMENSION SHOW IN THE DRAWING
N.B.2 - CABLE HEAT SHRINKABLE
CM2-1 CF1-1 WHITE/BROWN+ BROWN
CM2-2 CF1-2 WHITE/ORANGE + ORANGE
*1 CM2-3 CF1-3 WHITE/BLUE
Fig.57 - F03608 cable for pointing (remove it after commission pointing)

2
CM2-4 CF1-4 BLUE 5 CF1-4 *3 RED 0,6 mm (Blue)
2
CM2-5 CF1-5 WHITE/GREEN 4 CF1-5 *2 BLACK 06 mm (Green)
Part FROM TO Part FROM TO

COLOURS NOTES
Ref. COURSE Ref. COURSE
115
Fig.58 - ALFOplus connectors
Fig.59 - SFP LC/LC
Fig.60 - SFP LC/OPEN END
116 MN.00273.E - 004

Fig.61 - SFP LC/ SFP LC
Fig.62 - LC connector
Fig.63 - SFP into ALFOplus
MN.00273.E - 004 117

Fig.64 - Locked connection
Fig.65 - Unplug SFP
118 MN.00273.E - 004

Section 4.
LINE-UP
9 LINE-UP OF ALFOPLUS SYSTEM
9.1 GENERAL
The line-up consists of the following steps:
• switch on the equipment
• alarm leds check
• optimizing antenna orientation
• insertion into telecontrol and reachability of far-end terminal
• check of Ethernet connections
• quality evaluation with performance monitoring
Operations involving the use of SCT/WebLCT are roughly described here. For further details please refer
to software manual.
9.2 SWITCH ON
Checks to be performed before switching on the unit are:
• check external power supply voltage
• antenna presence - check the connection between ODU output flange and antenna.
If everything is correct, switch on the ODU.
MN.00273.E - 004 119

9.3 ALARM LED CHECK
On the rear panel of ODU unit there is a transparent plastic window to see the status of an internal LED
dedicated to show unit alarms. Further information about ALFOplus alarms can be found onto the chapter
“ALFOplus alarms and troubleshooting”.
Colours status:
• Red light
- ON – An internal alarm is active. Connect SCT/WebLCT for troubleshooting

- Flashing – An external alarm is active.
• Green light
- Flashing – No radio connection with remote ODU. In this case, if remote equipment is on and
properly oriented, it is necessary to check frequency, attenuation and link identifier (see parag.
“First configuration.....”) and to evaluate the alarm list with SCT/WebLCT software
- ON – the radio connection with remote ODU is active.
9.4 CONNECTION PROCEDURE
Connection between PC and ALFOplus can be made directly or through a switch. Connect the PC to ALFO-
plus in LAN2 connector and start the communication toward the ODU microcontroller with SCT/WebLCT
program.
First connection (you know IP address)
1. with SCT or browser (internet explorer) type IP address stored previously (Factory Default are
172.20.254.14 ODU L and 172.20.255.15 ODU H)
- User: system
- Password: siaemicr
2. after connection it’s possible to modify IP address, etc.....
Rescue connection (you don’t know IP address)
1. Assign a static IP address (see Fig.66) to PC (the IP must belong to the rescue network)
ALFOplus rescue IP address: 173.20.253.13
ALFOplus rescue subnetwork mask: 255.255.0.0
2. Connect your PC directly to ALFOplus with a LAN direct cable
3. By SCT, connect using Local Area Network, press connect button, type in equipment IP address
172.20.253.13 user: System, Password: siaemicr and press “RESCUE” button (see Fig.67)
4. Follow the instructions of rescue login (see Fig.68)
5. In “Rescue Connection” mode it is possible to set or recover the values for management access.
120 MN.00273.E - 004

Fig.66 - IP address setting
Fig.67 - Local area connection
MN.00273.E - 004 121

Fig.68 - Rescue login
9.5 FIRST CONFIGURATION
To activate a radio link it is necessary to program the ODU (local and remote side) in some basic items
listed in the following:
• modulation & capacity
• Tx frequency & power
• port configuration
• agent IP address and equipment ID
• store routing table
• remote element list
• restart equipment
Bandwidth and Modulation setting
See Fig.69.
Into WebLCT at position:
• Equipment menu
• Equipment - BW & MOD/LINK ID
• In Capacity and Modulation card, you can select Bandwidth&Modulation desired. Press Apply
and Confirm
• Enable or disable ACM Engine, if you want dynamic modulation. Press Apply and Confirm
Attention: Use the same parameters on remote unit.
122 MN.00273.E - 004

Fig.69 - Bandwidth&Modulation, Local Link ID
Tx frequency setting
See Fig.70. Into WebLCT at position:
• Equipment menu
• Radio Branch
• Settings card: in this card you have to select Duplex frequency and Tx frequency; Rx frequency
value is shown in the top status bar and is set automatically. Press Apply and Confirm.
Tx frequency to be set at remote radio is equal to local Rx frequency. Please set the frequency according
to your license.
Attention: Remember that the whole radio link can work only if ODUs chosen for local and remote side have
equal sub-band and different Tx module (example of permissible pair ODU 1H and ODU 1L).
Tx power setting
See Fig.70. Into WebLCT at position:
• Equipment menu
• Radio Branch
• Powers card: in this card you have to set maximum Tx power; in this card it is possible to enable
automatic transmission and set ATPC thresholds: Rx Level Min, Rx Level Max. Press Apply and Con-
firm.
Attention: Use the same parameters at remote ODU.
MN.00273.E - 004 123

Fig.70 - Frequency and power setting
Port configuration setting
See Fig.71.
• Equipment menu
• Main - Port configuration
• In Ethernet card you can modify the IP address, netmask and supervisioning parameters. Press
Apply and Confirm. Press Store and Confirm.
124 MN.00273.E - 004

Fig.71 - Port configuration
Agent IP address setting
See Fig.72.
• Equipment menu
• Main - Equipment properties
• In General Info card, change the equipment ID and agent IP address equal to Ethernet IP ad-
dress. Press Apply and Confirm.
Fig.72 - Equipment properties
MN.00273.E - 004 125

Remote element list setting
See Fig.73.
Into WebLCT at right position:
• Press the button to expand Remote Element List window
• Clear and Apply new list
• Add station, type “SIAE LINK” and press OK
• Select the station just created and add local element:
- IP address: type local radio IP address
- type of element: managed by SCT

Press OK, Apply and Confirm.
• Add remote element:
- IP address: type remote radio IP address
- Type of element: Remote link

Press OK, Apply and Confirm.
Restart equipment
See Fig.73.
• Equipment menu
• Main - Equipment properties
• Press the button Restart Equipment and Confirm.
Fig.73 - Remote element list
126 MN.00273.E - 004

9.6 OPTIMIZING ANTENNA ALIGNMENT WITH RX MEASUREMENT
When the whole radio link is on, antenna alignment can be optimised. Antenna alignment optimization is
performed depending on the Rx signal power at local and remote equipment and evaluating both local and
remote S/N value maximizing them.
There are two possibilities to see the Rx signal power level:
• through WebLCT interface
• through a voltmeter connected to Auxiliary connector on the ODU (F03608 cable - see Fig.57).
In order to get the Rx signal power level by means of software, connect the PC to serial input of ALFOplus
(LAN2) and start the communication towards the ODU microcontroller with SCT/WebLCT supervisory pro-
gram.
Into WebLCT is shown in the top status bar (Rx1A=-value dBm) see Fig.73.
If you’re using a voltmeter the Rx signal power level is available on the auxiliary connector of ODU, the
measurement can be performed with a proper cable (see Fig.57).
Following this last procedure, the voltage you’re reading with the voltmeter is proportional to Rx power
level, refer to Tab.27.
Tab.27 - Voltage measured in auxiliary port
Received Signal (dBm) Signal Output (V) Error (dB)
-20 4.68 ±5
-30 3.51 ±5
-40 2.34 ±3
-50 1.17 ±3
-60 0 ±3
-70 -1.17 ±3
-80 -2.34 ±3
-90 -3.51 ±5
-100 -4.68 ±5
Formula RSSI=Offset + (Signal/Output)/Slope
Slope (V/dB) 0.117
Offset (dBm) -60
Typical Rx signal power level: -40dBm. It is the most important item to optimise the antenna alignment,
but in a situation of interference Rx level can be good, BER acceptable but BER margin low. This means
that when Rx fields will decrease then BER will increase fast. The situation can be easily shown with SCT/
WebLCT software looking at Signal Quality level.
Into WebLCT Software select:
• Equipment menu
• Maintenance
• S/N Meas. card (see Fig.75)
Refer to the “ALFOplus operator” manual for parameter evaluation.
MN.00273.E - 004 127

Fig.74 - Main menu with Rx signal power level
Fig.75 - S/N measurement monitoring
Antenna aiming
Antenna aiming devices allow to perform the following adjustments with respect to the starting aiming po-
sition:
- horizontal ± 15° operating on the nut (3) shown in Fig.76, only after having loosen
the nuts (7), (8), (9), (10) of Fig.77.
- vertical ± 15° operating on vertical adjustment worm screw (2) shown in Fig.76
only after having loosen nuts (1), (2), (11) of Fig.77 and (4) of Fig.76
For adjustment from 0° to +30° extract nut (1) Fig.77 and position it in
hole (4), extract nut (2) Fig.77 and position it in hole (6). Operate on
vertical adjustment worm screw (2) after having loosen nuts (1), (2), (11) of
Fig.77 and (4) of Fig.76.
For adjustment from 0° to –30° extract nut (1) of Fig.77 and position it in hole
(3), extract nut (2) of Fig.77 and position it in hole (5). Operate on vertical
adjustment worm screw (2) after having loosen nuts (1), (2), (11) of Fig.77
and (4) of Fig.76.
For vertical adjustment some markers, every 10°, are available on support. The bigger marker gives 0°
starting aiming position. Once the optimum aiming position is obtained, tighten firmly the four nuts (1),
(2), (11) of Fig.77 and (4) of Fig.76 for vertical adjustment and the four nuts (7), (8), (9), (10) of Fig.77
for horizontal adjustment. Tighten with 15 mm wrench and 32 Nm torque.
128 MN.00273.E - 004

- grounding The grounding can be connected with the available bolt spring washer and
flat washers as shown.
3
4
5 1
2
Fig.76 - Vertical and horizontal adjustment
MN.00273.E - 004 129

15 mm wrench 15 mm wrench
32 Nm torque 32 Nm torque
7
4 11 1 8
3
10
9 15 mm wrench
5 6 32 Nm torque
2
15 mm wrench
32 Nm torque
Fig.77 - Antenna aiming block
9.7 ODU ACCESSING AND REMOTE MANAGEMENT
Local ALFOplus ODU and its remote ODU can be accessed at LAN2 or LAN1 ports (depending on supervi-
sioning parameters). Once the radio link has been configured, connect to the local ODU and specify the
network password too. SCT/WebLCT window shows also a field referred to the remote ODU:
• double click on this field -> remote ODU is opened in monitor mode
• if it’s necessary to act on remote ODU you have to login on remote ODU (IP address is known be-
cause you can read it from monitor windows).
If the remote element list has been done correctly, into WebLCT software press button Open Far End to
open and manage the Remote Radio window.
130 MN.00273.E - 004

9.8 COMMISSIONING MEASURES FOR ETHERNET TRAFFIC
9.8.1 Ethernet connection stability
Settings
To verify the Ethernet performances set the equipment following Tab.28
Tab.28 - Ethernet connection stability
Local Terminal Remote terminal
LAN1 LAN2 PORT A LAN1 LAN2 PORT A
Interface type Electrical Electrical Electrical Electrical
Rate Control Full Rate Full Rate Port Enable Full Rate Full Rate Port Enable
Flow Control Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable
Master/Slave Master Master Master Master

Lan Setting
M/S Autoneg. Disable Disable Disable Disable
MAC learning Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable
Auto Auto
Speed/Duplex Auto (1Gbit) Auto (1Gbit)
(100Mbit) (100Mbit)
Cable crossover Auto Auto Auto Auto

Port Based VLAN
LAN1 / Disable Enable / Disable Enable

Vitual Lan (802.1Q)
LAN2 Disable / Enable Disable / Enable
Port A Enable Enable / Enable Enable /
802.1 Manage-
Fallback Disable Fallback Fallback Disable Fallback
ment
Default Vid 101 102 111 101 102 111
Port default Port default Port default Port default

Priority 802.1P
0 7 0 7
Max Packet size 2048 byte
Mac address
300 sec
aging time
Ethernet Switch
QinQ ETH Type 9100
Priority
Native 802.1p
Radio to Lan
Priority
Native 802.1p
LAN to radio
MN.00273.E - 004 131

9.9 FIRMWARE
The releases of ALFO firmware, downloadable by the operator, are listed in Fig.78.
Using SCT/WebLCT Software open Main menu, select Software info & Maintenance and in the window
shown in Fig.78 select Equipment Firmware and Download SW Setup.
Downloading time depends on connection used between PC and ALFOplus.
Further informations can be found on software manual of ALFOplus equipment.
Fig.78 - Software download procedure
Fig.79 - Upgrade software
132 MN.00273.E - 004

9.10 BACK UP FULL EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION WITHOUT POS-
SIBILITY OF MODIFYING THE PARAMETERS
9.10.1 Scope
This chapter describes the procedure to back up the full equipment configuration. This permits to recover
the original equipment configuration in case of faulty CONTROLLER module replacement with spare.
9.10.2 Configuration upload and download using SCT
Configuration upload
Foreword: it is advisable to backup the configuration after the first installation. Proceed as follows:
1. Select “Equipment Configuration Wizard” from menu “Tools”; “Equipment Configuration Wi-
zard” window will be displayed.
2. Select “Upload” and then “Backup Full Equipment Configuration”; “Template Selection” win-
dow will be displayed.
3. Select the correct equipment template (in case of uncorrected choice the backup will be aborted).
4. Press OK and then select the equipment to be uploaded from “Upload Configuration File” window.
5. Press OK and then edit the file name from “Save backup as” window.
6. Press Save; “Equipment Configuration Wizard: Complete Backup” window will appear.
The window shows dynamically the backup procedure. If everything is OK, at the end of the upload
will appear the word “done” showing the procedure success.
7. Press OK to finish.
Configuration download
Once the spare controller has been installed, or every time you need the primitive configuration, proceed
as follows:
1. Select “Equipment Configuration Wizard” from menu “Tools”. “Equipment Configuration Wizard”
window will be displayed.
2. Select “Download” and than “Restore Full Equipment Configuration” from Equipment Configu-
ration Wizard. “Select Backup File” window will be displayed.
3. Select the wanted backup file with extension .bku and then press Open. “Download Configuration
File” window will be displayed.
4. Select the equipment to download and then press OK; “Equipment Configuration Wizard: Complete
restore” window will be displayed. This window shows dynamically the download operation. The
word “done” indicates that download has been successfully.
5. Press OK to finish.
Warning: In case of EOC alarm proceed to restart the equipment.
MN.00273.E - 004 133

9.10.3 Configuration upload and download using WEBLCT
Configuration upload
Foreword: it is advisable to backup the configuration after the first installation. Proceed as follows:
1. select “Backup/Restore Configuration” in the “Main menu”
2. in the field “Backup File name” write the name of the configuration file you are going to upload in
the PC, complete with the full path of its folder
3. push Backup. The status of the backup procedure is shown in the “Operation Status” field.
Configuration download
Once the spare Controller has been installed or every time the saved configuration is necessary, proceed
as follow:
1. Select “Backup/Restore Configuration” in the “Main menu”
2. In the field “Restore file name” write the name of the configuration file you are going to download
in the ODU, complete with the full path of its folder
3. Push Restore. The status of the backup procedure is shown in the “operation Status” field. During
Restore operation the equipment creates a backup configuration, you can come back to this config-
uration at the end of the restore pushing Revert (see Fig.80)
Warning: the file full backup, making use of SCT, isn’t compatible with WebLCT and vice versa.
Fig.80 - Backup/Restore configuration
134 MN.00273.E - 004

Section 5.
MAINTENANCE
10 ALFOPLUS ALARMS AND LOOPS
10.1 GENERAL
A radio link generating alarm requires troubleshooting.
The troubleshooting of the ALFOplus can be organized on the basis of alarms.
Basic alarms come from LEDs on the equipment and all the active alarms can be observed through SCT/
WebLCT.
In this document is present ALFOplus alarm list and a description of the loop facilities provided into the
equipment.
10.2 ALARMS
Alarms can be pointed out through unit LEDs and/or through SCT/WebLCT software.
10.2.1 Alarm indications
On the rack of the ALFOplus there is a LED that shows the alarm status.
The information provided is:
• Red light
- ON – An internal alarm is active. Connect SCT/WebLCT for troubleshooting.
• Green light
MN.00273.E - 004 135

properly oriented, it is necessary to evaluate the Alarm list with SCT/WebLCT software.
- ON – Radio connection with remote ODU is active.
10.2.2 SCT/WebLCT displayed alarms
All the alarms are displayed through SCT/WebLCT program running on a PC. Alarms are divided in groups
to refer to a particular functionality and are characterized by programmable severity.
Alarms, with group and a short description, are listed into Tab.29.
In the following you can find a class list and the item they describe:
• COMMON – Failure or status relevant to whole equipment

• ETH LAN - Failure on Ethernet traffic
• P.M. ACM - Performance monitoring on ACM
• P.M. G.828 – Performance monitoring on signal quality

• P.M. Rx Power – Performance monitoring on received signal
• P.M. Tx Power – Performance monitoring on transmitted signal
• Plug-in module - Alarm on plug-in device

• RADIO - Alarm on Tx/Rx section of ALFOplus
• SETS - Synchronisation alarm or status
• SNTP - Server lost (unavailable in this SW version)

• Unit - Hardware or software unit alarm
Tab.29 - Alarms
Group WebLCT name Description
Equip Rmon Alarm Statistic Counter Ethernet
Equip Manual Operation At least one manual operation on
G.8032 Port operating Status Alarm Ring protection link alarm

COMMON
OAM FM Fail Alarm MEP not receiving
OAM FM MEP Configuration Mismatch

MEP not configured properly
Alarm
Eth Lan Phy Lacp Protocol Down Link aggregation not working
Eth Lan Phy Master Slave Configura- Autonegotiation GBit Frame configuration
tion Fault failed
Eth Lan Phy Link Loss Forwarding Link loss in remote port
ETH LAN
Eth Lan Phy Autonegotiation Autonegotiation failed
Eth Lan Phy Sync Synchronization not aligned
Eth Lan Phy Link Loss Loss of Ethernet signal
pm ACM - 24H Alarm

P.M. ACM ACM measurements on received radio signal
pm ACM - 15H Alarm
136 MN.00273.E - 004

pm G828 - 24H SepAlarm
pm G828 - 15M SepAlarm
pm G828 - UAS Alarm

Quality measurements on radio signal re-
P.M. G.828 pm G828 - 24H Ses Alarm
ceived a
pm G828 - 24H ES Alarm
pm G828 - 15M Ses Alarm
pm G828 - 15M ES Alarm
pm RxPwr - 24H Rlts Alarm

Rx Power measurements on radio signal re-
P.M. Rx Power
pm RxPwr - 15M Rlts Alarm ceived a.
pm TxPwr - 24H Rlts Alarm

Tx Power measurements on radio signal
P.M. Tx Power
pm TxPwr - 15M Rlts Alarm transmitted a.
Plug-in Los Alarm Loss of Signal on Module
Plug-in Module Alarm SFP module is missing

Plug-in module
Plug-in Module Mismatch Alarm Wrong SFP module
Plug-in Status Change SFP module is active
Radio Config Mismatch Set Mod/Cap mismatch on radio link
Radio Rx Quality Low Warning Received signal quality degraded
Radio Rx Quality Low Alarm Insufficient received signal quality
Radio Rx AGC Fail Automatic gain Control alarmed
Radio Rt Vco Fail Voltage Controlled Oscillator failure
Radio Tx Power Alarm Transmitted power below the fixed threshold
Radio Rx Power Low Alarm Received power below the fixed threshold
Radio Modulation Fail Alarm Alarm on radio transmitting side

RADIO
Radio Demodulation Fail Alarm Alarm on radio receiving side
Radio Rx Alarm Set Low received power on radio
Radio Invalid Frequency Alarm Set Wrong frequency on radio link
Bit error rate/Syncloss on received radio sig-

Radio Equip Ber Sync Loss Alarm
nal
Capacity is reduced respect to the one with

Radio Equip Reduced Capacity Alarm
reference modulation
Radio Equip Link Telemetry Fail Alarm Telemetry failed to radio link missing
Radio Equip Link ID Alarm Wrong Link ID received
Timing Sync Active Status Timing Sync is active
Timing Sync Drift Alarm Selected Synch bad quality
Timing Sync Los Alarm Selected Synch missing

SETS
Timing Generator Holdover Status Equipment in holdover status
Timing Generator Free Running Sta-

Equipment in Free Running status
tus
Timing Generator T0 Fail Alarm T0 synch missing
MN.00273.E - 004 137

SNTP Sntp Client Unicast Server Lost Server is missing
Unit SW Mismatch Alarm SW mismatch detected on the unit
Unit HW Mismatch Alarm HW mismatch detected on the unit
Unit Unit Not Responding Alarm No response from the unit
Unit Missing Alarm Missing condition on the unit
Unit Fail Alarm Failure on the unit
a. Regarding periods of 15 minutes or 24 hours.
138 MN.00273.E - 004

11 ALFOPLUS MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOT-
ING
11.1 GENERAL
In the following pages are listed all the procedures to follow for ALFOplus maintenance.
When corrective maintenance is necessary, a troubleshooting procedure helps the operator to identify the
failure unit to replace it with a spare one.
11.2 MAINTENANCE
Maintenance consists of two stages:
1. periodical checks to be carried out using SCT/WebLCT
2. corrective maintenance.
Periodical checks serve to detect correct radio performance without the presence of any alarm condition.
Corrective maintenance takes place as soon as one or more alarm conditions are in existence. Operation
sequence to be carried out is shown in “Troubleshooting” paragraph.
11.2.1 Periodical checks
System routine maintenance consists in a series of routine checks aiming to verify correct operating mode
of an alarm–free system.
These checks are made through SCT/WebLCT program, installed on a PC.
The items to be checked are:
• Tx power (i.e., attenuation value in dB vs. nominal value)
• Rx field (value measured must comply with that resulting from hop calculation)
• S/N (presence of possible interference)
• BER (values measured must comply with hop calculations)
How these operations are carried out is specified in “Line–up” section or, more widely, in ALFOplus software
manual.
MN.00273.E - 004 139

11.2.2 Corrective maintenance (troubleshooting)
Corrective maintenance starts as soon as one or more alarm indication become active.
Corrective maintenance purpose is to locate the faulty unit and replace it with spare after having verified
that the cause of faulty is not external to the equipment.
Corrective maintenance does not include malfunction due to a wrong or incomplete configuration of the
system or to failure due to alarm indication system itself or any other cause external to the system, i.e.:
cabling damage, main voltage loss, antenna misalignment and propagation problems.
See paragraph 11.3 TROUBLESHOOTING for details.
11.3 TROUBLESHOOTING
Main purpose of troubleshooting is to declare an unit faulty or not.
After this step alarms are caused by bad configuration and/or external causes.
11.3.1 Faulty condition detection
Alarms can be pointed out through unit LEDs and/or through SCT/WebLCT software:
Unit LEDs
Near the circular connector of the ODU it’s shown the status of a LED, which can be green or red. The in-
formation provided are:
• Red light
- ON – An internal alarm is active. Connect SCT/WebLCT for troubleshooting.
• Green light
properly oriented, it is necessary to evaluate the alarm list with SCT/WebLCT software.
- ON – Radio connection with remote ODU is active.
SCT/WebLCT
Alarms are divided in classes to refer to a particular hardware or software functionality and are character-
ized by their programmable gravity.
A window with alarm classes list is available for local ODU (the unit PC is physically connected to) and for
remote ODU.
The presence of a current alarm is pointed out by SCT/WebLCT program, see software manual.
The presence of an historical alarm is pointed out in the event log window of SCT/WebLCT program (see
Fig.81 and Fig.82).
140 MN.00273.E - 004

11.3.2 Troubleshooting of a faulty unit
Into SCT/WebLCT software, in Equipment menu select View Current Alarm menu.
In this window they are displayed the current alarm and their severity. Depending on which alarm classes
are active, following situation can arise.
ODU alarm classes active
ALFOplus is made up by a single unit, the ODU. This is the minimum spare part.
If one or more of the following conditions occur, the ODU is faulty:
• One or more alarms inside the ODU hardware class are active
• One or more alarms inside ODU link class are active
If the following condition occurs a further investigation is necessary:
• Sw config alarm in ODU software class is active

Every log window has to be inspected. In the window are present additional information about Sw
config alarm; if it is impossible to clear through restart, the unit is not able to work properly and
needs to be tested again in SIAE final test department.
Troubleshooting on remote ODU
With SCT/WebLCT program the alarm on the Remote ODU are displayed the same way as for the local one.
The above described troubleshooting can be carried out for the remote ODU too.
Fig.81 - Current alarm monitoring
MN.00273.E - 004 141

Fig.82 - Event log window
142 MN.00273.E - 004

Section 6.
PROGRAMMING AND
SUPERVISION
12 PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION
12.1 GENERAL
ALFOplus is programmed and supervised using a software tool: SCT/WebLCT. This subject is fully described
in the separated software manual (WebLCT ALFOplus - Software application for the management of ALFO-
plus equipment).
12.2 SUPERVISION THROUGH ETHERNET
The provided structure for Ethernet traffic defines the management facilities of "ALFOplus" unit.
MN.00273.E - 004 143

Ge LAN1 Internal port
Radio side
SWD
Switcing Device
Ge LAN2
Mgt
Mac Rate adapter

Controller (fpga)
Fig.83 - Traffic management of "ALFOplus" unit
12.2.1 General
In general you suppose that the equipment performs the "host" functionality in an Ethernet network and
that supervisory network follows the traffic routing, eventually separated by "VLAN tag". The management
can be:
• Disable the Management by “Ge LAN1” can’t get access to the controller
• Local Access Only “Ge LAN2” may access only to the access only to the local controller.
Supervisory network is not connected to radio side
• In-Band The management can access to the controller if it’s configured

with “VLAN tag”
• Out-of-Band “Ge LAN2” can access to local controller and supervisory network is
connected to radio side using “VLAN stacking” function to separate
the traffic
• In-band-drop-node “Ge LAN2” can access to local controller and the port is considered as a
node into the supervisory network “in-band” (with VLAN tag)
The modalities can be enabled/disabled by software to the LAN1 and LAN2 interface.
Supervisory network can be disable selectively line side and radio site.
Local access to the unit must be always guaranteed by "Ge LAN2".
144 MN.00273.E - 004

12.2.2 Configurations
Possible configurations of supervisioning traffic are shown in Tab.30.
Tab.30 - Configurations
Internal Port
LAN1 LAN2 Description
(Radio side)
Disable LAO Disable Lan1 only payload and Lan2 only local management
Disable OoB Disable/OoB Lan1 only payload and Lan2 only management
In-Band LAO Disable/IB Lan1 Vlan mngt+payload and Lan2 only local management
In-Band Drop/node Disable/IB Lan1 Vlan mngt+payload and Lan2 only management
In-Band In-Band Disable Lan1 Vlan mngt+payload and Lan2 Vlan mngt+payload
In-Band Disable Disable/IB Lan1 Vlanmngt+payload and Lan2 disable
12.2.3 "Local Access only" management
This modality allows the access to "ALFOplus" unit only with the local "Ge LAN2" in the easiest possible
way, with frames without " VLAN tag" and therefore with IP domain shared. This modality can be used if
the user is IP addresses owner and so the equipment is inserted into a traffic network level 3 (IP routing).
For this reason, the Security management is defined by the operator using the function (Access Control
List).
Ge LAN2
CPU
Port based vlan
Fig.84 - Local access only
MN.00273.E - 004 145

12.2.4 "VLAN based in-band" management
This procedure allow the access of "ALFOplus" unit by "Ge LAN1" more safely, because the IP domain is
independent of payload traffic through dedicated "VLAN tag" (configurable). This mode can be used when
the user is owner of "VLAN tag" and the equipment is interposed in a level 2 network traffic (switching).
In that case the management routing is obtain to filtering of "VLAN tag".
Ge LAN1
%
" #
Ge LAN2
$
#
CPU
Vlan map filtering
Fig.85 - VLAN based in-band management
To reduce the visibility of the controller to line side ( ), radio side ( ) and extent supervision network ( )
you can enable or disable the paths indicated in filtering "VLAN tag". The path ( ) can be enabled only if
both line ports, are enabled to "In-band" management.
In case of protection configuration through LAG or ELP, the path ( ) cannot be enabled.
12.2.5 "VLAN based In-band" drop node
This particular way allows to introduce the supervision traffic "VLAN based In-band" (mandatory with
"VLAN tag") using "Ge LAN2" obligatorily without "VLAN tag". The line ports are linked together using the
filtering "VLAN tag" (set as tagged the default port "Ge LAN2").
Ge LAN1 #
# #
Ge LAN2
$ $
MGT CPU
Vlan map filtering Port based vlan
Fig.86 - VLAN based In-band drop node
This mode allows the supervision of outdoor units placed in the same site, but excludes the possibility of
simultaneous monitoring "Out-of-band" in the network.
The insertion direction (on the line and radio side) can be selectively enabling or disabling the paths cor-
responding ( and ). This mode is not available in the case of interfaces in a secure configuration.
146 MN.00273.E - 004

12.2.6 "Out-of-band" management
This mode allows the access to the local "ALFOplus" unit of frame without "VLAN tag" and the extension of
the supervision network to the remote terminal. The priority of management traffic is obtained with "VLAN
tag".
In remote terminal the payload and management traffic are again divided. This involves increasing the
length of traffic frame of four bytes.
Fe LAN2 Fe LAN2
#
CPU CPU
Port based vlan Vlan map filtering
Fig.87 - Out-of-band management
12.2.7 Configurability
The management mode of equipment affects the Ethernet Channel and on the Switch configuration (RSTP,
OAM, …). Therefore it is important to decide the optimal configuration of traffic Ethernet and management,
to avoid blocking traffic conditions.
12.2.8 Address
The unit uses a single IP address associated at the management port of controller and a single "default
gateway". Depending on the configuration of these addresses are visible from supervision "in-band" and
"Out-of-band".
12.2.9 Restore supervisioning access mode
The “RESTORE OF CPU ACCESS” command is available through Serial port (F03594 cable) via Hypertermi-
nal (115200bps,n,8,1):
• Login SYSTEM
• Password SIAEMICR
• Type string: lao
This string restores the factory default of port configuration:
• LAN1 disable
• LAN2 local access only
MN.00273.E - 004 147

148 MN.00273.E - 004
Section 7.
COMPOSITION
13 COMPOSITION
13.1 GENERALS
This document shows ALFOplus system available versions with the relevant main specifications and char-
acteristics.
13.2 ALFOPLUS SYSTEM IDENTIFYING LABEL
Different versions are identified by a label. This label contains the main characteristics of the equipment
(see Tab.31).
13.3 AVAILABLE ALFOPLUS VERSIONS
In Tab.31 you find the available versions with following information:
• Code
• ODU frequency
• Go-return
• RF Subband (L and H)
MN.00273.E - 004 149

Tab.31 - RF band and RF filter band
Code Description Go-return (MHz) RF/Subband
GB 8606 ODU ALFOplus 11 490/530 11 GHz 1L
GB 8607 ODU ALFOplus 11 490/530 11 GHz 1H
GB 8612 ODU ALFOplus 13 266 13 GHz 1L
GB 8613 ODU ALFOplus 13 266 13 GHz 1H
150 MN.00273.E - 004

GB 9524 ODU ALFOplus 7L 196 7L GHz 1L
GB 9525 ODU ALFOplus 7L 196 7L GHz 1H
MN.00273.E - 004 151

GB 9534 ODU ALFOplus 7M 154 7M GHz 1L
GB 9535 ODU ALFOplus 7M 154 7M GHz 1H
152 MN.00273.E - 004

MN.00273.E - 004 153

13.4 ODU INSTALLATION KIT
The ALFOplus system installation kit is concerning pole mounting of ODU according with the operating fre-
quency, dimensions and presence of the centring ring.
- V32308 for ODU with frequency from 15 to 38 GHz

The following installation kit is supplied with the equipment.
1+0 version
60 to 129 mm pole mounting kit:
• centring ring and relevant screws
• pole support system plus antenna (already assembled) and pole fixing brackets
• 1+0 ODU support and relevant screws
• ODU with O-ring and devices for ground connection.
Required tools for mounting (not supplied):
• N.1 2.5 mm Allen wrench
• N.1 3 mm Allen wrench

• N.1 6 mm Allen wrench
• N.1 13 mm spanner
• N.2 17 mm spanner.
154 MN.00273.E - 004

Section 8.
ADDENDUM
14 INTRODUCTION
14.1 GENERALS
This document describes technical specifications (international standards, frequency range, bandwidth,
power, sensitivities, ....) for all available frequencies of ALFOPlus system.
MN.00273.E - 004 155

15 ALFOPLUS 11GHZ CHARACTERISTICS
15.1 FOREWORD
The equipment complies with the following international standards:
• EN 301 489-4 for EMC
• ITU-R F.387-10 and CEPT T/R 12-06 for RF channel arrangement
• FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101
• EN 302 217 for digital point to point fixed radio
• EN 300 132-2 characteristics of power supply
• EN 300 019 Climatic Characteristics (Operation: Class 4.1 for ODU; storage: class 1.2; transport:
class 2.3)
• EN 60950-22 for Safety
• IEEE 802.3 for Ethernet interfaces
15.2 GENERAL
The reported values are guaranteed if not specifically defined otherwise.
15.2.1 Available frequencies
- Frequency band see Tab.32
Tab.32 - Frequency band
Frequency range Duplex spacing Reference

(MHz) (MHz) recommendation
CEPT T/R 12-06

10700 - 11700 530
ITU-R F.387-10
CEPT T/R 12-06

10700 - 11700 490 ITU-R F.387-10
FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101
10700 - 11705 500 FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101
- Modulation scheme 4QAMs/4QAM/16QAMs/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/

128QAM/256QAM/512QAM/1024QAM
- Capacity see Tab.33
156 MN.00273.E - 004

- RF filter range Wide Filter Option see Tab.34
- Transceiver tuning range see Tab.34
The frequency carrier limits are given in Tab.35 and Tab.36.
Tab.33 - Net Radio Throughput in Mbit/s versus channel bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment
Channel bandwidth (MHz)

Modulation
Type 7 10 14 28 30 40 56
4QAMs 9.295 11.408 16.393 32.956 35.117 46.462 65.912
4QAM 10.872 15.328 22.025 44.279 47.183 62.426 88.558
16QAMs 16.225 22.875 32.870 66.081 70.414 93.163 132.161
16QAM 21.080 29.720 42.705 85.854 91.484 121.040 171.708
32QAM 24.483 34.517 49.599 99.713 106.251 140.578 199.425
64QAM 30.293 42.707 61.368 123.373 131.463 173.936 246.746
128QAM 36.102 50.898 73.137 147.034 156.675 207.294 294.068
256QAM 41.912 59.088 84.906 170.694 181.887 240.651 341.389
512QAM 47.763 67.279 96.759 194.524 207.100 274.009 389.048
1024QAM 53.572 75.469 108.529 218.185 232.312 307.336 436.369
Tab.34 - Filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 11GHz
FREQUENCY RANGE: 10.7 ÷ 11.7 MHz - GO-RETURN: 490 MHz

CEPT T/R 12-06 and ITU-R F.387-10 - f0=11200 MHz
RF Filter Tuning Range

Sub Band Lower Half Limits [MHz] Upper Half Limits [MHz]
[MHz]
1 10715 - 10895 11205 - 11385
2 10875 - 11055 11365 - 11545 180
3 11035 - 11215 11525 - 11705

CEPT T/R 12-06 and ITU-R F387-10 - f0=11200 MHz

[MHz]
1 10695 - 10875 11225 - 11405
2 10855 - 11035 11385 - 11565 180
3 11015 - 11195 11545 - 11725


[MHz]
1 10700 - 10730 11200 - 11230

30
3 11170 - 11200 11670 - 11700
MN.00273.E - 004 157

Tab.35 - 10700 MHz - 11700 MHz band - Go-return 490 MHz - Frequency carrier limits
FREQUENCY RANGE: 10700 ÷ 11700 MHz - CEPT T/R 12-06 and ITU-R F.387-10- GO-RETURN: 490 MHz
- 180 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range
SUB BAND 1
Lower half of the band Higher half of the band

Channel
bandwidth
Lowest Frequency Highest Frequency Lowest Frequency Highest Frequency
[MHz]
Carrier [MHz] Carrier [MHz] Carrier [MHz] Carrier [MHz]
7 10718.5 10891.5 11208.5 11381.5
14 10722 10888 11212 11378
28 10729 10881 11219 11371
40 10735 10875 11225 11365
56 10743 10867 11233 11357
SUB BAND 2

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
7 10878.5 11051.5 11368.5 11541.5
14 10882 11048 11372 11538
28 10889 11041 11379 11531
40 10895 11035 11385 11525
56 10903 11027 11393 11517
SUB BAND 3
Channel Lower half of the band Higher half of the band

bandwidth
[MHz] Carrier [MHz] Carrier [MHz] Carrier [MHz] Carrier [MHz]
7 11038.5 11211.5 11528.5 11701.5
14 11042 11208 11532 11698
28 11049 11201 11539 11691
40 11055 11195 11545 11685
56 11063 11187 11553 11677
158 MN.00273.E - 004

Tab.36 - 10700 MHz - 11700 MHz band - Go-return 530 MHz - Frequency carrier limits
FREQUENCY RANGE: 10700 ÷ 11700 MHz - CEPT T/R 12-06 and ITU-R F.387-10 - GO-RETURN: 530 MHz
- 180 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range
SUB BAND 1

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
7 10698.5 10871.5 11228.5 11401.5
14 10702 10868 11232 11398
28 10709 10861 11239 11391
40 10715 10855 11245 11385
56 10723 10847 11253 11377
SUB BAND 2

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
7 10858.5 11031.5 11388.5 11561.5
14 10862 11028 11392 11558
28 10869 11021 11399 11551
40 10875 11015 11405 11545
56 10883 11007 11413 11537
SUB BAND 3

bandwidth
7 11018.5 11191.5 11548.5 11721.5
14 11022 11188 11552 11718
28 11029 11181 11559 11711
40 11035 11175 11565 11705
56 11043 11167 11573 11697
Tab.37 - 10700 MHz - 11700 MHz band - FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101 - Go-Return 490 MHz - Fre-
quency carrier limits
FREQUENCY RANGE: 10700 ÷ 11700 MHz - FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101
Go-Return: 490 MHz - 180 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range
SUB BAND 1

Channel
bandwidth Lowest Frequency Highest Frequency Lowest Frequency Highest Frequency
[MHz]
10 10720 10890 11210 11380
30 10730 10880 11220 11370
MN.00273.E - 004 159

40 10740 10875 11225 11365
SUB BAND 2

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
10 11880 11050 11370 11540
30 11890 11040 11380 11530
40 11895 11035 11385 11525
SUB BAND 3

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
10 11040 11210 11530 11700
30 11050 11200 11540 11690
40 11055 11195 11545 11685
FREQUENCY RANGE: 10700 ÷ 11700 MHz - FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101
Go-Return: 500 MHz - 30 MHz RF filter tuning range
SUB BAND 1

Channel
[MHz]
10 10705 10725 11205 11225
30 10715 10715 11215 11215
40 - - - -
SUB BAND 2

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
10 11175 11195 11675 11695
30 11185 11185 11685 11685
40 - - - -
160 MN.00273.E - 004

15.2.2 Transmitter characteristics
- Maximum transmit power see Tab.39
Tab.39 - Maximum transmit power
Nominal Output Power Guaranteed Output Nominal Power

MODULATION
[dBm] Power [dBm] Tolerance
4QAMs 27 25
4QAM 27 25
16QAMs 24 22
16QAM 24 22
32QAM 23 21
±2 dB
64QAM 23 21
128QAM 23 21
256QAM 23 21
512QAM 23 21
1024QAM 22 20
- Transmit power with ACM Mean Constant Mode: All the selected ACM
profiles transmit the same output power level,
that is equal to the Maximum transmit power
indicated in the table above for the highest
modulation level selected.
Hybrid Mode: the ACM profiles above the
reference modulation transmit in Peak Constant
Mode (i.e. each modulation transmits the output
power indicated in the table above). Below the
reference modulation the Mean Constant Mode is
followed.
- Tx bandwidth see Tab.34
- Frequency agility following ITU-R/CEPT channel plans or at 250 kHz

steps
- Built-in transmit power attenuation range 20 dB
- Attenuation Step 1 dB step
- RTPC attenuation range 20 dB

- Accuracy of built-in transmit power attenuation ±2 dB
- Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) range 20 dB
- ATPC Attenuation Step 1 dB
- Spurious emissions according to ETSI EN 301 390
- RF frequency stability ±5 ppm

±10 ppm (including ageing)
- Muting attenuation 60 dB
MN.00273.E - 004 161

15.2.3 Receiver characteristics
- Receiver bandwidth See Table 2
- Noise Figure 6.5 dB
- Equivalent Noise Bandwidth [MHz] see Tab.40
Tab.40 - Equivalent Noise Bandwidth [MHz]
CHANNEL BANDWIDTH
ENBW [MHz]
[MHz]
7 6.1
10 8.6
14 12.2
28 24.4
30 26
40 34.4
56 48.8
- Signal to Noise Ratio [dB] see Tab.41
Tab.41 - Signal to Noise Ratio [dB]
CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz] 4QAMs 4QAM 16QAMs 16QAM 32QAM
BER=10-6 7.5 9 13.5 15.5 18

7
BER=10-10 9.5 11 15.5 17.5 20
BER=10-6 7.5 9 13.5 15.5 18

10
BER=10-10 9.5 11 15.5 17.5 20
BER=10-6 6.5 9 13.5 15.5 18

14
BER=10-10 8.5 11 15.5 17.5 20
BER=10-6 6.5 9 13.5 16 18

28
BER=10-10 8.5 11 15.5 18 20
BER=10-6 6.5 9 13.5 16 18

30
BER=10-10 8.5 11 15.5 18 20
BER=10-6 6.5 9 13.5 16 18

40
BER=10-10 8.5 11 15.5 18 20
BER=10-6 6.5 9 13.5 15.5 18

56
BER=10-10 8.5 11 15.5 17.5 20
CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz] 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1024QAM
BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33.5

7
BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35.5
BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33.5

10
BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35.5
162 MN.00273.E - 004

BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33
14
BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35
BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33

28
BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35
BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33

30
BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35
BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33

40
BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35
BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33

56
BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35
- Guaranteed receiver sensitivities 3 [dBm] see Tab.42
Tab.42
BER=10-6 -93.0 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0

7
BER=10-10 -91.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0
BER=10-6 -92.0 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5

10
BER=10-10 -90.0 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -78.5
BER=10-6 -92.0 -88.5 -85.5 -82.0 -80.0

14
BER=10-10 -90.0 -86.5 -83.5 -80.0 -78.0
BER=10-6 -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.5

28
BER=10-10 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.5
BER=10-6 -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -77.0

30
BER=10-10 -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -75.0
BER=10-6 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -75.5

40
BER=10-10 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -73.5
BER=10-6 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0

56
BER=10-10 -84.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.0 -72.0
BER=10-6 -79.5 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0

7
BER=10-10 -77.5 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0
BER=10-6 -78.0 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.0

10
BER=10-10 -76.0 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.0
BER=10-6 -77.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.0

14
BER=10-10 -75.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0
3 Typical receiver sensitivities are 2 dB lower
MN.00273.E - 004 163

BER=10-6 -74.5 -71.5 -68.0 -65.5 -61.5
28
BER=10-10 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -59.5
BER=10-6 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5 -65.0 -61.0

30
BER=10-10 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -59.0
BER=10-6 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5 -64.0 -59.5

40
BER=10-10 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -57.5
BER=10-6 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0

56
BER=10-10 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0 -60.5 -56.0
- Rx Spurious emissions according to ETSI EN 301 390

- AGC dynamic range from -22 dBm to Threshold @ BER=10-6
- Accuracy of Rx level indication @ 25 C° (PC reading)±2dB in the range -22dBm ÷ Thresholds @

BER=10-6
- Accuracy of Rx level indication over the

whole temperature range (PC reading) ±3dB in the range -50dBm ÷ Thresholds @
BER=10-6
±4dB in the range -49dBm ÷ -22dBm
- Maximum input level for BER 10-6 -22 dBm
- Residual BER (RBER) 10-12
- Receiver Dynamic Range (4) [dB] see Tab.43
Tab.43 - Receiver Dynamic Range [dB]
CHANNEL
BANDWIDTH 4QAMs 4QAM 16QAMs 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1024QAM
[MHz]
7 58.0 55.5 52.0 49.0 47.0 44.5 41.0 38.5 35.5 32.0
10 57.0 54.0 50.5 47.5 45.5 43.0 39.5 37.0 34.0 30.0
14 57.0 53.5 50.5 47.0 45.0 42.5 39.0 36.0 33.0 29.0
28 54.0 50.5 47.0 44.0 42.5 39.5 36.5 33.0 30.5 26.5
30 53.5 50.0 46.5 43.5 42.0 39.0 36.0 32.5 30.0 26.0
40 52.5 49.0 45.5 42.5 40.5 38.0 35.0 31.5 29.0 24.5
56 51.0 47.5 44.0 41.0 39.0 36.5 33.5 30.0 27.5 23.0
15.2.4 Radio flange
- Radio WG flange type UBR 100
4 Range over which at least RBER performances are guaranteed (-25dBm ÷ Threshold @ 10-6 +10dB)
164 MN.00273.E - 004

15.2.5 Power supply and consumption
- Operating voltage 48 Vdc ±15%
Tab.44 - Power consumption
Typical Power Guaranteed Power

Consumption (W) Consumption (W)
35 37
15.2.6 Mechanical characteristics
- Physical size of system components see Tab.45
Tab.45 - Physical size of system components
270.4 287.3 154.6
- Weight of system components 4.3 kg
MN.00273.E - 004 165

16.1 FOREWORD
• EN 301 489-4 for EMC
• ITU-R F497 and CEPT Recommendation ERC/REC 12-02 for RF channel arrangement
• EN 300 132-2 Characteristics of power supply
• EN 300 019 Climatic Characteristics (Operation: class 4.1 for ODU; storage: class 1.2; transport:
class 2.3).
16.2 GENERAL
Reference
Frequency Range [GHz] Duplex Spacing [MHz]
Recommendation
12.75 ÷ 13.25 266 ITU-R F497 CEPT T/R 12-02

- RF filter range Wide Filter Option (see Tab.48)
The frequency carrier limits are given in Tab.49.
166 MN.00273.E - 004

Tab.47 - Net Radio Throughput in Mbit/s versus Channel Bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment
Channel bandwidth [MHz]

Modulation type
7 14 28 56
4QAMs 9.295 16.393 32.956 65.912
4QAM 10.872 22.025 44.279 88.558
16QAMs 16.225 32.870 66.081 132.161
16QAM 21.080 42.705 85.854 171.708
32QAM 24.483 49.599 99.713 199.425
64QAM 30.293 61.368 123.373 246.746
128QAM 36.102 73.137 147.034 294.068
256QAM 41.912 84.906 170.694 341.389
512QAM 47.763 96.759 194.524 389.048
1024QAM 53.572 108.529 218.185 436.369
Tab.48 - RF filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 13GHz
FREQUENCY RANGE: 12.75 ÷ 13.25 GHz - GO-RETURN: 266 MHzITU-R F.497 - CEPT ERC/REC 12-02 E -
f0=12996 MHz

[MHz]
1 12751 ÷ 12835 13017 ÷ 13101
2 12835 ÷ 12919 13101 ÷ 13185

84
3 12891 ÷ 12975 13157 ÷ 13241
4 12779 ÷ 12863 13045 ÷ 13129
MN.00273.E - 004 167

Tab.49 - 12.75 ÷ 13.25 GHz band - Go-Return 266 MHz - Frequency carrier limits
FREQUENCY RANGE: 12.75 ÷ 13.25 GHz - GO-RETURN: 266 MHz -84 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range
SUB BAND 1

Channel band-
width [MHz] Lowest Frequency Highest Frequency Lowest Frequency Highest Frequency
7 12754.5 12831.5 13020.5 13097.5
14 12758 12828 13024 13094
28 12765 12821 13031 13087
56 12779 12807 13045 13073
SUB BAND 2

Channel band-
7 12838.5 12915.5 13104.5 13181.5
14 12842 12912 13108 13178
28 12849 12905 13115 13171
56 12863 12891 13129 13157
SUB BAND 3

Channel band-
7 12894.5 12971.5 13160.5 13237.5
14 12898 12968 13164 13234
28 12905 12961 13171 13227
56 12919 12947 13185 13213
SUB BAND 4

Channel band-
7 12782.5 12866.5 13048.5 13132.5
14 12786 12870 13052 13136
28 12793 12877 13059 13143
56 12807 12891 13073 13157
168 MN.00273.E - 004

Nominal Output Power Guaranteed Output

MODULATION Nominal Power Tolerance
[dBm] Power [dBm]
4QAMs 27 25
4QAM 27 25
16QAMs 24 22
16QAM 24 22
32QAM 23 21
±2 dB
64QAM 23 21
128QAM 23 21
256QAM 23 21
512QAM 23 21
1024QAM 22 20
followed.

steps


MN.00273.E - 004 169

- Receiver bandwidth See Tab.48
Tab.51 - Equivalent Noise Bandwidth
CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz] ENBW [MHz]
7 6.4
14 12.2
28 24.4
56 48.8
- Signal to Noise Ratio [dB] see Tab.52
Tab.52 - Signal to Noise Ratio [dB]
BER=10-6 7 9 13.5 15.5 18

7
BER=10-10 9 11 15.5 17.5 20
BER=10-6 6.5 9 13.5 15.5 18

14
BER=10-10 8.5 11 15.5 17.5 20
BER=10-6 6.5 9 13.5 16 18

28
BER=10-10 8.5 11 15.5 18 20
BER=10-6 6.5 9 13.5 15.5 18

56
BER=10-10 8.5 11 15.5 17.5 20
BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33.5

7
BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35.5
BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33

14
BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35
BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33

28
BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35
BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33

56
BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35
170 MN.00273.E - 004

- Guaranteed receiver sensitivities 5 [dBm] see Tab.53
Tab.53 - Guaranteed receiver sensitivities [dBm]
BER=10-6 -93.0 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0

7
BER=10-10 -91.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0
BER=10-6 -92.0 -88.5 -85.5 -82.0 -80.0

14
BER=10-10 -90.0 -86.5 -83.5 -80.0 -78.0
BER=10-6 -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.5

28
BER=10-10 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.5
BER=10-6 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0

56
BER=10-10 -84.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.0 -72.0
64QAM 128QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1024QAM
BER=10-6 -79.5 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0

7
BER=10-10 -77.5 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0
BER=10-6 -77.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.0

14
BER=10-10 -75.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0
BER=10-6 -74.5 -71.5 -68.0 -65.5 -61.5

28
BER=10-10 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -59.5
BER=10-6 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0

56
BER=10-10 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0 -60.5 -56.0

BER=10-6

whole temperature range (PC reading) ±3dB in the range -50dBm ÷ Thresholds @
BER=10-6
- ±4dB in the range -49dBm ÷ -22dBm

-6
- Maximum input level for BER 10 -22 dBm
- Receiver Dynamic Range6 [dB] see Tab.54
5 Typical receiver sensitivities are 2 dB lower

6 Range over which at least RBER performances are guaranteed (-25 dBm ÷ Threshold @10-6 + 10 dB)
MN.00273.E - 004 171

Tab.54 - Receiver Dynamic Range
CHANNEL
16QAM 128QA 256QA 512QA 1024QA
BANDWIDTH 4QAMs 4QAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM
s M M M M
[MHz]
7 58.0 55.5 52.0 49.0 47.0 44.5 41.0 38.5 35.5 32.0
14 57.0 53.5 50.5 47.0 45.0 42.5 39.0 36.0 33.0 29.0
28 54.0 50.5 47.0 44.0 42.5 39.5 36.5 33.0 30.5 26.5
56 51.0 47.5 44.0 41.0 39.0 36.5 33.5 30.0 27.5 23.0
16.2.4 Radio flange
- Operating voltage range 48 Vdc ±15%


Consumption [W] Consumption [W]
37 39
Width [mm] Height [mm] Depth [mm]
270.4 287.3 154.6
- Weight of system components 4.3 Kg
172 MN.00273.E - 004

17.1 FOREWORD
• EN 301 489-4 for EMC
• ITU-R F.636 and CEPT Recommendation T/R 12-07 for RF channel arrangement
class 2.3)
17.2 GENERAL
Frequency range Duplex spacing Reference

(MHz) (MHz) recommendation
14501 - 15348 420 ITU-R F.636
14403 - 15348 490 ITU-R F.636
14501 - 15348 728 CEPT T/R 12-07
14613 - 15251 322 N.A.
14620 - 15244 315 N.A:
MN.00273.E - 004 173

- RF filter range Wide Filter Option see Tab.58
- Transceiver tuning range: see Tab.58
Frequency carrier limits are given in Tab.59, Tab.60, Tab.61, Tab.62, Tab.63 and Tab.64.
Tab.58 - Net Radio throughput in Mbit/s versus Channel Bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment
Channel bandwidth (MHz)

Modulation
Type 7 14 28 56
4QAMs 9.295 16.393 32.956 65.912
4QAM 10.872 22.025 44.279 88.558
16QAMs 16.225 32.870 66.081 132.161
16QAM 21.080 42.705 85.854 171.708
32QAM 24.483 49.599 99.713 199.425
64QAM 30.293 61.368 123.373 246.746
128QAM 36.102 73.137 147.034 294.068
256QAM 41.912 84.906 170.694 341.389
512QAM 47.763 96.759 194.524 389.048
1024QAM 53.572 108.529 218.185 436.369
174 MN.00273.E - 004

Tab.59 - RF filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 15 GHz
FREQUENCY RANGE:14501 ÷ 15348 MHz - GO-RETURN: 420 MHzITU-R F636 - f0=11701MHz

[MHz]
1 14500 - 14620 14920 - 15040
2 14612 - 14732 15032 - 15152

120
3 14724 - 14844 15144 - 15264
4 14808 - 14928 15228 - 15348
FREQUENCY RANGE: 14403 ÷ 15348 MHz - GO-RETURN: 490 MHzITU-R F636 - f0=11701MHz

[MHz]
1 14402 - 14522 14892 - 15012
2 14514 - 14634 15004 - 15124

120
3 14626 - 14746 15116 - 15236
4 14738 - 14858 15228 - 15348
FREQUENCY RANGE: 14501 ÷ 15348 MHz - GO-RETURN: 728 MHzCEPT T/R 12-07 - f0=14924MHz

[MHz]
1 14500 - 14620 15228 - 15348 120
FREQUENCY RANGE: 14600 ÷ 15240 MHz - GO-RETURN: 322 MHz

[MHz]
1 14613 - 14705 14935 - 15027
2 14669 - 14761 14991 - 15083
3 14725 - 14817 15047 - 15139 92
4 14781 - 14873 15103 - 15195
5 14837 - 14929 15159 - 15251

[MHz]
1 14620 - 14705 14935 - 15020
2 14676 - 14761 14991 - 15076
3 14732 - 14817 15047 - 15132 85
4 14788 - 14873 15103 - 15188
5 14844 - 14929 15159 - 15244
MN.00273.E - 004 175

Tab.60 - 14501 - 14348 MHz band - Go-Return 420 MHz - Frequency carrier limits
FREQUENCY RANGE: 14501 ÷ 15348 MHz - GO-RETURN: 420 MHz - 120 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range
SUB BAND 1

Channel
[MHz]
7 14503.5 14616.5 14923.5 15036.5
14 14507 14613 14927 15033
28 14514 14606 14934 15026
56 14528 14592 14948 15012
SUB BAND 2

Channel
[MHz]
7 14615.5 14728.5 15035.5 15148.5
14 14619 14725 15039 15145
28 14626 14718 15046 15138
56 14640 14704 15060 15124
SUB BAND 3

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
7 14727.5 14840.5 15147.5 15260.5
14 14731 14837 15151 15257
28 14738 14830 15158 15250
56 14752 14816 15172 15236
SUB BAND 4

bandwidth
7 14811.5 14931.5 15231.5 15351.5
14 14815 14935 15235 15355
28 14822 14942 15242 15362
56 14836 14956 15256 15376
176 MN.00273.E - 004

Tab.61 - 1403 - 15348 MHz band - Go-return 490 MHz - Frequency carrier limits
SUB BAND 1

Channel
[MHz]
7 14405.5 14518.5 14895.5 15008.5
14 14409 14515 14899 15005
28 14416 14508 14906 14998
56 14430 14494 14920 14984
SUB BAND 2

Channel
[MHz]
7 14517.5 14630.5 15007.5 15120.5
14 14521 14627 15011 15117
28 14528 14620 15018 15110
56 14542 14606 15032 15096
SUB BAND 3

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
7 14629.5 14742.5 15119.5 15232.5
14 14633 14739 15123 15229
28 14640 14732 15130 15222
56 14654 14718 15144 15208
SUB BAND 4

bandwidth
7 14741.5 14861.5 15231.5 15351.5
14 14745 14865 15235 15355
28 14752 14872 15242 15362
56 14766 14886 15256 15376
MN.00273.E - 004 177

SUB BAND 1

Channel
[MHz]
7 14503.5 14616.5 15231.5 15344.5
14 14507 14613 15235 15341
28 14514 14606 15242 15334
56 14528 14592 15256 15320
178 MN.00273.E - 004

SUB BAND 1

7 14616.5 14701.5 14938.5 15023.5
14 14620 14698 14942 15020
28 14627 14691 14949 15013
56 14641 14677 14963 14999
SUB BAND 2

7 14672.5 14757.5 14994.5 15079.5

14 14676 14754 14998 15076
28 14683 14747 15005 15069
56 14697 14733 15019 15055
SUB BAND 3

7 14728.5 14813.5 15050.5 15135.5
14 14732 14810 15054 15132

28 14739 14803 15061 15125
56 14753 14789 15075 15111
SUB BAND 4

7 14784.5 14869.5 15106.5 15191.5
14 14788 14866 15110 15188
28 14795 14859 15117 15181

56 14809 14845 15131 15167
SUB BAND 5

7 14840.5 14925.5 15162.5 15247.5
14 14844 14922 15166 15244
28 14851 14915 15173 15237
56 14865 14901 15187 15223
MN.00273.E - 004 179

SUB BAND 1

7 14623.5 14701.5 14938.5 15016.5
14 14627 14698 14942 15013
28 14634 14691 14949 15006
56 14648 14677 14963 14992
SUB BAND 2

7 14679.5 14757.5 14994.5 15072.5

14 14683 14754 14998 15069
28 14690 14747 15005 15062
56 14704 14733 15019 15048
SUB BAND 3

7 14735.5 14813.5 15050.5 15128.5
14 14739 14810 15054 15125

28 14746 14803 15061 15118
56 14760 14789 15075 15104
SUB BAND 4

7 14791.5 14869.5 15106.5 15184.5
14 14795 14866 15110 15181
28 14802 14859 15117 15174

56 14816 14845 15131 15160
SUB BAND 5

7 14847.5 14925.5 15162.5 15240.5
14 14851 14922 15166 15237
28 14858 14915 15173 15230
56 14872 14901 15187 15216
180 MN.00273.E - 004

Tab.65 -Maximum transmit power
Nominal Output Power Guaranteed Output Power Nominal Power

MODULATION
[dBm] [dBm] Tolerance
4QAMs 27 25
4QAM 27 25
16QAMs 24 22
16QAM 24 22
32QAM 23 21
±2 dB
64QAM 23 21
128QAM 23 21
256QAM 23 21
512QAM 23 21
1024QAM 22 20
reference modulation the Mean Constant Mode
is followed.
- Frequency agility Following ITU-R/CEPT channel plans or at 250 kHz

steps



- Muting attenuation 60 db
MN.00273.E - 004 181

- Receiver bandwidth see Tab.58
CHANNEL BANDWIDTH
ENBW [MHz]
[MHz]
7 6.4
14 12.2
28 24.4
56 48.8
- Signal to Noise Ratio (dB) see Tab.67
Tab.67 - Signal to Noise Ratio (dB)
BER=10-6 7 9 13.5 15.5 18

7
BER=10-10 9 11 15.5 17.5 20
BER=10-6 6.5 9 13.5 15.5 18

14
BER=10-10 8.5 11 15.5 17.5 20
BER=10-6 6.5 9 13.5 16 18

28
BER=10-10 8.5 11 15.5 18 20
BER=10-6 6.5 9 13.5 15.5 18

56
BER=10-10 8.5 11 15.5 17.5 20
BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33.5

7
BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35.5
BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33

14
BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35
BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33

28
BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35
BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33

56
BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35
- Guaranteed receiver sensitivities [dBm] 7 see Tab.68
7 Typical receiver sensitivities is 2dB lower
182 MN.00273.E - 004

BER=10-6 -93.0 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0

7
BER=10-10 -91.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0
BER=10-6 -92.0 -88.5 -85.5 -82.0 -80.0

14
BER=10-10 -90.0 -86.5 -83.5 -80.0 -78.0
BER=10-6 -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.5

28
BER=10-10 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.5
BER=10-6 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0

56
BER=10-10 -84.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.0 -72.0
BER=10-6 -79.5 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0

7
BER=10-10 -77.5 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0
BER=10-6 -77.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.0

14
BER=10-10 -75.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0
BER=10-6 -74.5 -71.5 -68.0 -65.5 -61.5

28
BER=10-10 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -59.5
BER=10-6 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0

56
BER=10-10 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0 -60.5 -56.0
- Rx Spurious emissions According to ETSI EN 301 390
- AGC dynamic range From -22 dBm to Threshold @ BER=10-6

- Accuracy of Rx level indication @ 25° C (PC reading)±2dB in the range -22dBm ÷Thresholds @
BER=10-6
- Accuracy of Rx level indication over the whole

temperature range (PC reading) ±3dB in the range -50dBm ÷Thresholds @
BER=10-6
- Receiver Dynamic Range (8) (dB) see Tab.69
8 Range over which at least RBER performances are guaranteed (-25dBm ÷ threshold @10-6 +10dB)
MN.00273.E - 004 183

Tab.69 - Receiver Dynamic Range
CHANNEL
[MHz]
7 58.0 55.5 52.0 49.0 47.0 44.5 41.0 38.5 35.5 32.0
14 57.0 53.5 50.5 47.0 45.0 42.5 39.0 36.0 33.0 29.0
28 54.0 50.5 47.0 44.0 42.5 39.5 36.5 33.0 30.5 26.5
56 51.0 47.5 44.0 41.0 39.0 36.5 33.5 30.0 27.5 23.0
17.2.4 Radio flange
- Radio WG flange type CBR 140


37 39
270.4 287.3 154.6
184 MN.00273.E - 004

18 ALFOPLUS 17 GHZ CHARACTERISTICS
18.1 FOREWORD
• EN 301 489-4 for EMC
• CEPT ERC REC 70-03
• EN 302 217 for point to point fixed radio
class 2.3)
18.2 GENERAL
DUPLEX SPACING REFERENCE

FREQUENCY RANGE [MHz]
[MHz] RECOMMENDATION
17100 ÷ 17300 95 ÷193 BEPT ERC REC 70-03

MN.00273.E - 004 185

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz]

MODULATION TYPE
7 14 28 56
4QAMs 9.295 16.393 32.956 65.912
4QAM 10.872 22.025 44.279 88.558
16QAMs 16.225 32.870 66.081 132.161
16QAM 21.080 42.705 85.854 171.708
32QAM 24.483 49.599 99.713 199.425
64QAM 30.293 61.368 123.373 246.746
128QAM 36.102 73.137 147.034 294.068
256QAM 41.912 84.906 170.694 341.389
512QAM 47.763 96.759 194.524 389.048
1024QAM 53.572 108.529 218.185 436.369
FREQUENCY RANGE: 17100 ÷ 17300 MHz - GO-RETURN: 95 ÷ 193 MHz
Sub Band Lower Half Limits [MHz] Upper Half Limits [MHz] RF Filter Range [MHz]
1 17100 ÷ 17156 17244 ÷ 17300 56
Tab.75 - 17100 MHz ÷ 17300 MHz band - Go-return 144 MHz - Frequency carrier limits
FREQUENCY RANGE: 17100 ÷ 17300 MHz - GO-RETURN: 95 ÷ 193 MHz -

56 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range
SUB BAND 1

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
7 17103.5 17152.5 17247.5 17296.5
14 17107 17149 17251 17293
28 17114 17142 17258 17286
56 17128 17128 17272 17272
186 MN.00273.E - 004

- Maximum transmit power9 see Tab.89

MODULATION
4QAMs 22 20
4QAM 22 20
16QAMs 20 18
16QAM 20 18
32QAM 18 16
±2 dB
64QAM 18 16
128QAM 18 16
256QAM 18 16
512QAM 18 16
1024QAM 17 15
followed.

steps



- Muting attenuation: 60 dB
9 The maximum e.i.r.p. stated in CEPT ERC REC 70 Rec. should be 100mW
MN.00273.E - 004 187

- Noise Figure 8 dB
CHANNEL BANDWIDTH
ENBW [MHz]
[MHz]
7 6.4
14 12.2
28 24.4
56 48.8
BER=10-6 7.5 9 13.5 15.5 18

7
BER=10-10 9.5 11 15.5 17.5 20
BER=10-6 6.5 9 13.5 15.5 18

14
BER=10-10 8.5 11 15.5 17.5 20
BER=10-6 6.5 9 13.5 16 18

28
BER=10-10 8.5 11 15.5 18 20
BER=10-6 6.5 9 13.5 15.5 18

56
BER=10-10 8.5 11 15.5 17.5 20
BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33.5

7
BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35.5
BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33

14
BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35
BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33

28
BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35
BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33

56
BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35
- Guaranteed receiver sensitivities10 [dBm] see Tab.92
10 Typical receiver sensitivities are 2dB lower.
188 MN.00273.E - 004

BER=10-6 -91.5 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5

7
BER=10-10 -89.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -78.5
BER=10-6 -90.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -78.5

14
BER=10-10 -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -76.5
BER=10-6 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -76.0

28
BER=10-10 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -74.0
BER=10-6 -84.5 -81.0 -77.5 -74.5 -72.5

56
BER=10-10 -82.5 -79.0 -75.5 -72.5 -70.5
BER=10-6 -78.0 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5

7
BER=10-10 -76.0 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5
BER=10-6 -76.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.5 -62.5

14
BER=10-10 -74.0 -70.5 -67.5 -64.5 -60.5
BER=10-6 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5 -64.0 -60.0

28
BER=10-10 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -58.0
BER=10-6 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5 -61.0 -56.5

56
BER=10-10 -68.0 -65.0 -61.5 -59.0 -54.5

BER=10-6

temperature range (PC reading) ±3dB in the range -50dBm ÷ Thresholds @
BER=10-6
- Receiver Dynamic Range 11 (dB) see Tab.93
Tab.80 - Receiver Dynamic Range (dB)
CHANNEL
[MHz]
7 56.5 54.0 50.5 47.5 45.5 43.0 39.0 37.0 34.0 30.5
14 55.5 52.0 48.5 45.5 43.5 41.0 37.5 34.5 31.5 27.5
28 52.5 49.0 45.5 42.5 41.0 38.0 35.0 31.5 29.0 25.0
56 49.5 46.0 42.5 39.5 37.5 35.0 32.0 28.5 26.0 21.5
11 Range over which at least RBER performances are guaranteed (-25 dBm ÷ threshold @ 10-6 +10dB)
MN.00273.E - 004 189

18.2.4 Radio flange

37 39
270.4 287.3 154.6
190 MN.00273.E - 004

19.1 FOREWORD
• EN 301 489-4 for EMC
• ITU-R F.595 and CEPT Rec. T/R 12-03 for RF channel arrangement
• EN 302 217 for point to point fixed radio
class 2.3)
19.2 GENERAL
DUPLEX SPACING REFERENCE

FREQUENCY RANGE [MHz]
[MHz] RECOMMENDATION
17700 ÷ 19700 1010 ITU-R F.595 - CEPT T/R 12-03
17700 ÷ 19700 1560 ITU-R F.595 - Annex 7
17700 ÷ 19700 1560 FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101


MN.00273.E - 004 191


MODULATION TYPE
7 10 14 20 28 30 40 50 56
4QAMs 9.295 11.408 16.393 23.231 32.956 32.117 46.462 58.078 65.912
4QAM 10.872 15.328 22.025 31.213 44.279 47.183 62.426 78.033 88.558
16QAMs 16.225 22.875 32.870 46.581 66.081 70.414 93.163 116.454 132.161
16QAM 21.080 29.720 42.705 60.520 85.854 91.484 121.040 151.300 171.708
32QAM 24.483 34.517 49.599 70.289 99.713 106.251 140.578 175.723 199.425
64QAM 30.293 42.707 61.368 86.968 123.373 131.373 173.936 217.420 246.746
128QAM 36.102 50.898 73.137 103.647 147.034 156.675 207.294 259.117 294.068
256QAM 41.912 59.088 84.906 120.326 170.694 181.887 240.651 300.814 341.389
512QAM 47.763 67.279 96.759 137.004 194.524 207.100 274.009 342.511 389.048
1024QAM 53.572 75.469 108.529 153.683 218.185 232.312 307.336 384.208 436.369

ITU-R F.595 - CEPT REC T/R 12-03 - f0=18700 MHz
1 17699 ÷ 18058 18709 ÷ 19068 359
2 18016 ÷ 18375 19026 ÷ 19385 359
3 18332 ÷ 18691 19342 ÷ 19701 359
FREQUENCY RANGE: 17700 ÷ 18140 MHz paired with 19260 ÷ 19700 MHz -
GO-RETURN: 1560 MHz - ITU-R F.595 - Annex 7
1 17700 ÷ 18140 19260 ÷ 19700 440
192 MN.00273.E - 004

Tab.86 - 17700 MHz ÷ 19700 MHz band - Go-return 1010 - Frequency carrier limits
FREQUENCY RANGE: 17700 ÷ 19700 MHz - ITU-R F.595 - Annex7- GO-RETURN: 1010 MHz - 359 MHz
SUB BAND 1

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz] a
7 17702.5 18054.5 18712.5 19064.5
14 17706 18051 18716 19061
28 17712.75 18044.25 18722.75 19054.25
56 17726.5 18030.5 18736.5 19040.5
SUB BAND 2

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz] a.
7 18019.5 18371.5 19029.5 19381.5
14 18023 18368 19033 19378
28 18029.75 18361.25 19039.75 19371.25
56 18043.5 18347.5 19053.5 19357.5
SUB BAND 3

bandwidth
[MHz] a. Carrier [MHz] Carrier [MHz] Carrier [MHz] Carrier [MHz]
7 18335.5 18687.5 19345.5 19697.5
14 18339 18684 19349 19694
28 18345.75 18677.25 19355.75 19687.25
56 18359.5 18663.5 19369.5 19673.5
a. The actual channel bandwidth is compliant with a channel spacing of 7, 13.75, 27.5 and 55 MHz re-
spectively
MN.00273.E - 004 193

Tab.87 - 17700 MHz ÷ 18140 MHz paired with 19260 MHz - 19700 MHz band go-return 1560
MHz - Frequency carrier limits
FREQUENCY RANGE: 17700 ÷ 18140 MHz paired with 19260 ÷ 19700 MHz -
ITU-R F.595 - Annex 7 - GO-RETURN: 1560 MHz - 440 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range
SUB BAND 1

bandwidth
7 17703.5 18136.5 19263.5 19696.5
14 17707 18133 19267 19693
28 17713.75 18126.25 19273.75 19686.25
56 17727.5 18112.5 19287.5 19672.5
Tab.88 - 17700 MHz ÷ 18140 MHz paired with 19260 MHz 17700 MHz ÷ 19700 MHz band - FCC
CFR Title 47 Part 101 - Go-Return 1560 MHz - Frequency carrier limits
FREQUENCY RANGE: 17700 ÷ 19700 MHz FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101
GO-RETURN: 1560 MHz - 440 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range
SUB BAND 1

bandwidth
10 17705 18135 19265 19695
20 17710 18130 19270 19690
30 17715 18125 19275 19685
40 17720 18120 19280 19680
50 17725 18115 19295 19675
194 MN.00273.E - 004


MODULATION
4QAMs 23 21
4QAM 23 21
16QAMs 21 19
16QAM 21 19
32QAM 19 17
±2 dB
64QAM 19 17
128QAM 19 17
256QAM 19 17
512QAM 19 17
1024QAM 18 16
followed.

steps



- Muting attenuation: 60 dB
MN.00273.E - 004 195

- Noise Figure 7 dB
CHANNEL BANDWIDTH
ENBW [MHz]
[MHz]
7 6.1
10 8.6
14 12.2
20 17.2
28 24.4
30 26
40 34.4
50 43
56 48.8
BER=10-6 7.5 9 13.5 15.5 18

7
BER=10-10 9.5 11 15.5 17.5 20
BER=10-6 7.5 9 13.5 15.5 18

10
BER=10-10 9.5 11 15.5 17.5 20
BER=10-6 6.5 9 13.5 15.5 18

14
BER=10-10 8.5 11 15.5 17.5 20
BER=10-6 6.5 9 13.5 16 18

20
BER=10-10 8.5 11 15.5 18 20
BER=10-6 6.5 9 13.5 16 18

28
BER=10-10 8.5 11 15.5 18 20
BER=10-6 6.5 9 13.5 16 18

30
BER=10-10 8.5 11 15.5 18 20
BER=10-6 6.5 9 13.5 16 18

40
BER=10-10 8.5 11 15.5 18 20
BER=10-6 6.5 9 13.5 16 18

50
BER=10-10 8.5 11 15.5 18 20
BER=10-6 6.5 9 13.5 15.5 18

56
BER=10-10 8.5 11 15.5 17.5 20
196 MN.00273.E - 004

BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33.5

7
BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35.5
BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33.5

10
BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35.5
BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33

14
BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35
BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33

20
BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35
BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33

28
BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35
BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33

30
BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35
BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33

40
BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35
BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33

50
BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35
BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33

56
BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35
BER=10-6 -92.5 -90.0 -86.5 -83.5 -81.5

7
BER=10-10 -90.5 -88.0 -84.5 -81.5 -79.5
BER=10-6 -91.5 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0

10
BER=10-10 -89.5 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0
BER=10-6 -91.5 -88.0 -85.0 -81.5 -79.5

14
BER=10-10 -89.5 -86.0 -83.0 -79.5 -77.5
BER=10-6 -90.0 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0

20
BER=10-10 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.0
BER=10-6 -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -77.0

28
BER=10-10 -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -75.0
BER=10-6 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.5

30
BER=10-10 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.5
12 Typical receiver sensitivities are 2dB lower.
MN.00273.E - 004 197

BER=10-6 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.0
40
BER=10-10 -85.0 -81.5 -78.0 -75.0 -73.0
BER=10-6 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0

50
BER=10-10 -84.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.0 -72.0
BER=10-6 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -73.5

56
BER=10-10 -83.5 -80.0 -76.5 -73.5 -71.5
BER=10-6 -79.0 -75.5 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5

7
BER=10-10 -77.0 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5
BER=10-6 -77.5 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -64.5

10
BER=10-10 -75.5 -72.0 -69.5 -66.5 -62.5
BER=10-6 -77.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5 -63.5

14
BER=10-10 -75.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.5 -61.5
BER=10-6 -75.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0

20
BER=10-10 -73.5 -70.0 -67.0 -64.0 -60.0
BER=10-6 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5 -65.0 -61.0

28
BER=10-10 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -59.0
BER=10-6 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0 -64.5 -60.5

30
BER=10-10 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.5
BER=10-6 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -59.0

40
BER=10-10 -70.5 -67.5 -64.0 -61.5 -57.0
BER=10-6 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0

50
BER=10-10 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0 -60.5 -56.0
BER=10-6 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -57.5

56
BER=10-10 -69.0 -66.0 -62.5 -60.0 -55.5

BER=10-6

BER=10-6
198 MN.00273.E - 004

CHANNEL
[MHz]
7 57.5 55.0 51.5 48.5 46.5 44.0 40.5 38.0 36.0 35.0
10 56.5 53.5 51.0 47.0 45.0 42.5 39.0 36.5 33.5 29.5
14 56.5 53.0 50.0 46.5 44.5 42.0 38.5 35.5 33.0 32.5
20 55.0 51.5 48.5 45.0 43.0 40.5 37.0 34.0 31.0 27.0
28 53.5 50.0 46.5 43.5 42.0 39.0 36.0 32.5 30.5 30.0
30 53.0 49.5 46.0 43.0 14.5 38.5 35.5 32.0 29.5 25.5
40 52.0 48.5 45.0 42.0 40.0 37.5 34.5 31.0 28.5 24.0
50 51.0 47.5 44.0 41.0 39.0 36.5 33.5 30.0 27.5 23.0
56 50.5 47.0 43.5 40.5 38.5 36.0 33.0 29.5 27.0 22.5
19.2.4 Radio flange


33.5 35
270.4 287.3 154.6
MN.00273.E - 004 199

20.1 FOREWORD
• EN 301 489-4 for EMC
• ITU-R F.637-3 and CEPT Recommendation T/R 13-02 for RF channel arrangement
class 2.3).
20.2 GENERAL
FREQUENCY RANGE DUPLEX SPACING REFERENCE

[MHz] [MHz] RECOMMENDATION
ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 3

22000 ÷ 23600 1008
CEPT T/R 13-02
21200 ÷ 23600 1232 ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 1
21200 ÷ 23600 1200 ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 4
21200 ÷ 23600 1200 FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101
- Modulation scheme: 4QAMs/4QAM/16QAMs/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/

- Capacity: see Tab.97
200 MN.00273.E - 004

- RF filter range: Wide Filter Option see Tab.98
- Transceiver tuning range: See Tab.98
The frequency carrier limits are given in Tab.99, Tab.100 and Tab.101.
Tab.97 - Net radio throughtput in Mbit/s versus channel bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment

MODULATION TYPE
7 10 14 20 28 30 40 50 56
4QAMs 9.295 11.408 16.393 23.231 32.956 35.117 46.462 58.078 65.912
4QAM 10.872 15.328 22.025 31.213 44.279 47.183 62.426 78.033 88.558
16QAMs 16.225 22.875 32.870 46.581 66.081 70.414 93.163 116.454 132.161
16QAM 21.080 29.720 42.705 60.520 85.854 91.484 121.040 151.300 171.708
32QAM 24.483 34.517 49.599 70.289 99.713 106.251 140.578 175.723 199.425
64QAM 30.293 42.707 61.368 86.968 123.373 131.463 173.936 217.420 246.746
128QAM 36.102 50.898 73.137 103.647 147.034 156.675 207.294 259.117 294.068
256QAM 41.912 59.088 84.906 120.326 170.694 181.887 240.651 300.814 341.389
512QAM 47.763 67.279 96.759 137.004 194.524 207.100 274.009 342.511 389.048
1024QAM 53.572 75.469 108.529 153.529 218.185 232.312 307.336 384.208 436.369

ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 3 and CEPT T/R 13-02 - f0=21196 MHz
RF Filter Tuning
Range [MHz]
1 22002.75 ÷ 22338.75 23010.75 ÷ 23346.75

336
2 22254.75 ÷ 22590.75 23262.75 ÷ 23598.75

ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 1 - f0=21196 MHz
RF Filter Tuning
Range [MHz]
1 21224 ÷ 21616 22456 ÷ 22848 392
2 21616 ÷ 22008 22848 ÷ 23240 392
3 22008 ÷ 22344 23240 ÷ 23576 336

ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 4 - f0=21196 MHz
RF Filter Tuning
Range [MHz]
1 21200 ÷ 21605.5 22400 ÷ 22805.5 405.5
2 21600 ÷ 22000 22800 ÷ 23200 400
3 21997.5 ÷ 22400 23197.5 ÷ 23600 402.5
MN.00273.E - 004 201

Tab.99 - 21200 MHz ÷ 23600 MHz band - ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 3 and CEPT T/R 13-02 -
Go-return 1008 MHz - Frequency carrier limits
SUB BAND 1

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
7 22006.25 22335.25 23014.25 23343.25
14 22009.75 22331.75 23017.75 23339.75
28 22016.75 22324.75 23024.75 23332.75
56 22030.75 22310.75 23038.75 23318.75
SUB BAND 2

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
7 22258.25 22587.25 23266.25 23595.25
14 22261.75 22583.75 23269.75 23591.75
28 22268.75 22576.75 23276.75 23584.75
56 22282.75 22562.75 23290.75 23570.75
202 MN.00273.E - 004

Tab.100 - 21200 MHz ÷ 23600 MHz band - ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 1 - Go-return 1232 MHz - Fre-
FREQUENCY RANGE: 21200 ÷ 23600 MHz - GO-RETURN: 1232 MHz - ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 1 - 392-
336 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range
SUB BAND 1

bandwidth
7 21227.5 21612.5 22459.5 22844.5
14 21231 21609 22463 22841
28 21238 21602 22470 22834
56 21252 21588 22484 22820
SUB BAND 2

bandwidth
7 21619.5 22004.5 22851.5 23236.5
14 21623 22001 22855 23233
28 21630 21994 22862 23226
56 21644 21980 22876 23212
SUB BAND 3

Channel
[MHz]
7 22011.5 22340.5 23243.5 23572.5
14 22015 22337 23247 23569
28 22022 22330 23254 23562
56 22036 22316 23268 23548
MN.00273.E - 004 203

Tab.101 - 21200 MHz ÷ 23600 MHz band - ITU-R F.637-3 Annex 4 - Go-return 1200 MHz - Fre-
FREQUENCY RANGE: 21200 ÷ 23600 MHz - GO-RETURN: 1200 MHz - ITU-R F.637-3 Annex 4 - 400 -
402.5 - 405.5 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range
SUB BAND 1

bandwidth
7 21217 21602 22417 22802
14 21220.5 21598.5 22420.5 22798.5
28 21227.5 21591.5 22427.5 22791.5
56 21241.5 21577.5 22441.5 22777.5
SUB BAND 2

bandwidth
7 21609 21994 22809 23194
14 21612.5 21990.5 22812.5 23190.5
28 21619.5 21983.5 22819.5 23183.5
56 21633.5 21969.5 22833.5 23169.5
SUB BAND 3

Channel band-
7 22001 22386 23201 23586
14 22004.5 22382.5 23204.5 23582.5
28 22011.5 22375.5 23211.5 23575.5
56 22025.5 22361.5 23225.5 23561.5
Tab.102 - 21200 MHz ÷ 23600 MHz band - FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101 - Go-Return 1200 MHz -
Frequency carrier limits
FREQUENCY RANGE: 21200 ÷ 23600 MHz - GO-RETURN: 1200 MHz -

FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101 - 405.5-400-402.5 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range
SUB BAND 1

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
10 21205 21600.5 22405 22800.5
20 21210 21595.5 22410 22795.5
30 21215 21590.5 22415 22790.5
40 21220 21585.5 22420 22785.5
204 MN.00273.E - 004

50 21225 21580.5 22425 21780.5
SUB BAND 2

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
10 21605 21995 22805 23195
20 21610 21990 22810 23190
30 21615 21985 22815 23185
40 21620 21980 22820 23180
50 21625 21975 22825 23175
SUB BAND 3

Channel band-
10 22002.5 22395 23202.5 23586
20 22007.5 22390 23207.5 23590
30 22012.5 22385 23212.5 23585
40 22017.5 22380 23217.5 23580
50 22022.5 22375 23222.5 23575
MN.00273.E - 004 205


MODULATION
4QAMs 23 21
4QAM 23 21
16QAMs 21 19
16QAM 21 19
32QAM 19 17
±2 dB
64QAM 19 17
128QAM 19 17
256QAM 19 17
512QAM 19 17
1024QAM 18 16
followed.
- Frequency agility following ITU-R/CEPT channel plans or at

250 kHz steps


206 MN.00273.E - 004

- Noise figure 7 dB
CHANNEL BANDWIDTH
ENBW [MHz]
[MHz]
7 6.1
10 8.6
14 12.2
20 17.2
28 24.4
30 26
40 34.4
50 43
56 48.8
BER=10-6 7.5 9 13.5 15.5 18

7
BER=10-10 9.5 11 15.5 17.5 20
BER=10-6 7.5 9 13.5 15.5 18

10
BER=10-10 9.5 11 15.5 17.5 20
BER=10-6 6.5 9 13.5 15.5 18

14
BER=10-10 8.5 11 15.5 17.5 20
BER=10-6 6.5 9 13.5 16 18

20
BER=10-10 8.5 11 15.5 18 20
BER=10-6 6.5 9 13.5 16 18

28
BER=10-10 8.5 11 15.5 18 20
BER=10-6 6.5 9 13.5 16 18

30
BER=10-10 8.5 11 15.5 18 20
BER=10-6 6.5 9 13.5 16 18

40
BER=10-10 8.5 11 15.5 18 20
BER=10-6 6.5 9 13.5 16 18

50
BER=10-10 8.5 11 15.5 18 20
BER=10-6 6.5 9 13.5 15.5 18

56
BER=10-10 8.5 11 15.5 17.5 20
MN.00273.E - 004 207

BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33.5

7
BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35.5
BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33.5

10
BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35.5
BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33

14
BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35
BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33

20
BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35
BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33

28
BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35
BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33

30
BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35
BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33

40
BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35
BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33

50
BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35
BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33

56
BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35
14 Typical receiver sensitivities are 2dB lower
208 MN.00273.E - 004

BER=10-6 -92.5 -90.0 -86.5 -83.5 -81.5

7
BER=10-10 -90.5 -88.0 -84.5 -81.5 -79.5
BER=10-6 -91.5 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0

10
BER=10-10 -89.5 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0
BER=10-6 -91.5 -88.0 -85.0 -81.5 -79.5

14
BER=10-10 -89.5 -86.0 -83.0 -79.5 -77.5
BER=10-6 -90.0 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0

20
BER=10-10 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.0
BER=10-6 -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -77.0

28
BER=10-10 -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -75.0
BER=10-6 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.5

30
BER=10-10 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.5
BER=10-6 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.0

40
BER=10-10 -85.0 -81.5 -78.0 -75.0 -73.0
BER=10-6 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0

50
BER=10-10 -84.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.0 -72.0
BER=10-6 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -73.5

56
BER=10-10 -83.5 -80.0 -76.5 -73.5 -71.5
BER=10-6 -79.0 -75.5 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5

7
BER=10-10 -77.0 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5
BER=10-6 -77.5 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -64.5

10
BER=10-10 -75.5 -72.0 -69.5 -66.5 -62.5
BER=10-6 -77.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5 -63.5

14
BER=10-10 -75.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.5 -61.5
BER=10-6 -75.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0

20
BER=10-10 -73.5 -70.0 -67.0 -64.0 -60.0
BER=10-6 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5 -65.0 -61.0

28
BER=10-10 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -59.0
BER=10-6 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0 -64.5 -60.5

30
BER=10-10 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.5
BER=10-6 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -59.0

40
BER=10-10 -70.5 -67.5 -64.0 -61.5 -57.0
BER=10-6 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0

50
BER=10-10 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0 -60.5 -56.0
MN.00273.E - 004 209

BER=10-6 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -57.5
56
BER=10-10 -69.0 -66.0 -62.5 -60.0 -55.5

BER=10-6
- whole temperature range (PC reading) ±3dB in the range -50dBm ÷ Thresholds @
BER=10-6
- ±4dB in the range -49dBm ÷ -22dBm

15
- Receiver Dynamic Range (dB) see Tab.107
CHANNEL
[MHz]
7 57.5 55.0 51.5 48.5 46.5 44.0 40.5 38.0 35.0 31.5
10 57.5 53.5 50.0 47.0 45.0 42.5 39.0 36.5 33.5 29.5
14 56.5 53.0 50.0 46.5 44.5 42.0 38.5 35.5 33.0 32.5
20 55.0 51.5 48.0 45.0 43.0 40.5 37.0 34.0 31.0 27.0
28 53.5 50.0 46.5 43.5 42.0 39.0 36.0 32.5 30.5 30.0
30 53.0 49.5 46.0 43.0 41.5 38.5 35.5 32.0 29.5 25.5
40 52.0 48.5 45.0 42.0 40.0 37.5 34.5 31.0 28.5 24.0
50 51.0 47.5 44.0 51.0 39.0 36.5 33.5 30.0 27.5 23.0
56 50.5 47.0 43.5 40.5 38.5 36.0 33.0 29.5 27.0 22.5
20.2.4 Radio flange
- Radio WG flange type UBR220
- Power Consumption see Tab.108
210 MN.00273.E - 004

Tab.108 - Power Consumption

33.5 35
270.4 287.3 154.6
MN.00273.E - 004 211

21.1 FOREWORD
• EN 301 489-4 for EMC
• ITU-R F749-2 and CEPT Recommendation T/R 12-01 for RF channel arrangement
class 2.3).
21.2 GENERAL
FREQUENCY RANGE DUPLEX SPACING REFERENCE

[MHz] [MHz] RECOMMENDATION
37000 ÷ 39500 1260 ITU-R F749-2 - CEPT T/R 12-01
- Modulation scheme 4QAMs/QAM/16QAMs/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/

The frequency carrier limits are given in Tab.113.
212 MN.00273.E - 004


MODULATION TYPE
7 14 28 56
4QAMs 9.295 16.393 32.956 65.912
4QAM 10.872 22.025 44.279 88.558
16QAMs 16.225 32.870 66.081 132.161
16QAM 21.080 42.705 85.854 171.708
32QAM 24.483 49.599 99.713 199.425
64QAM 30.293 61.368 123.373 246.746
128QAM 36.102 73.137 147.034 294.068
256QAM 41.912 84.906 170.694 341.389
512QAM 47.763 96.759 194.524 389.048
1024QAM 53.572 108.529 218.185 436.369

ITU-R F.749-2 Annex 1 and CEPT REC T/R 12-01 Annex A - f0=38248 MHz
Lower Half Limits Upper Half Limits RF Filter Tuning

Sub Band
[MHz] [MHz] Range [MHz]
1 37058 ÷ 37618 38318 ÷ 38878

560
2 37618 ÷ 38178 38878 ÷ 39438
Tab.113 - 37058 MHz ÷ 39438 MHz band - Go-Return 1260 MHz - frequency carrier limits
SUB BAND 1

Channel
(MHz)
Carrier (MHz) Carrier (MHz) Carrier (MHz) Carrier (MHz)
7 37061.5 37614.5 38321.5 38874.5
14 37065 37611 38325 38871
28 37072 37604 38332 38864
56 37086 37590 38346 38850
SUB BAND 2

Channel
bandwidth
(MHz)
Carrier (MHz) Carrier (MHz) Carrier (MHz) Carrier (MHz)
7 37621.5 38174.5 38881.5 39434.5
14 37625 38171 38885 39431
28 37632 38164 38892 39424
56 37646 38150 38906 39410
MN.00273.E - 004 213

Nominal Output Power Guaranteed Output Nominal Power

MODULATION
(dBm) Power (dBm) Tolerance
4QAMs 19 17
4QAM 19 17
16QAMs 17 15
16QAM 17 15
32QAM 15 13
±2 dB
64QAM 15 13
128QAM 15 13
256QAM 15 13
512QAM 15 13
1024QAM 14 12
reference modulation the Mean Constant Mode
is followed.

steps


214 MN.00273.E - 004

- Noise Figure 9 dB
- Equivalent Noise Bandwidth (MHz) see Tab.115
Tab.115 - Equivalent Noise Bandwidth (MHz)
CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz] ENBW (MHz)
7 6.4
14 12.2
28 24.4
56 48.8
BER=10-6 7 9 13.5 15.5 18

7
BER=10-10 9 11 15.5 17.5 20
BER=10-6 6.5 9 13.5 15.5 18

14
BER=10-10 8.5 11 15.5 17.5 20
BER=10-6 6.5 9 13.5 16 18

28
BER=10-10 8.5 11 15.5 18 20
BER=10-6 6.5 9 13.5 15.5 18

56
BER=10-10 8.5 11 15.5 17.5 20
BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33.5

7
BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35.5
BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33

14
BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35
BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33

28
BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35
BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33

56
BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35
- Guaranteed receiver sensitivities16 (dBm) see Tab.117
16 Typical receiver sensitivities are 2dB lower
MN.00273.E - 004 215

Tab.117 - Guaranteed receiver sensitivities (dBm)
BER=10-6 -90.5 -88 -84.5 -81.5 -79.5

7
BER=10-10 -88.5 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -77.5
BER=10-6 -89.5 -86 -83 -79.5 -77.5

14
BER=10-10 -87.5 -84.0 -81.0 -77.5 -75.5
BER=10-6 -86.5 -83 -79.5 -76.5 -75

28
BER=10-10 -84.5 -81.0 -77.5 -74.5 -73.0
BER=10-6 -83.5 -80 -76.5 -73.5 -71.5

56
BER=10-10 -81.5 -78.0 -74.5 -71.5 -69.5
BER=10-6 -77.0 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5

7
BER=10-10 -75.0 -71.5 -69.0 -66.0 -62.5
BER=10-6 -75.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.5 -61.5

14
BER=10-10 -73.0 -69.5 -66.5 -63.5 -59.5
BER=10-6 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -59.0

28
BER=10-10 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5 -61.0 -57.0
BER=10-6 -69.0 -66.0 -62.5 -60.0 -55.5

56
BER=10-10 -67.0 -64.0 -60.5 -58.0 -53.5

BER=10-6

BER=10-6
CHANNEL
[MHz]
7 55.5 53 49.5 46.5 44.5 42 38.5 36 33 29.5
14 54.5 51 48 44.5 42.5 40 36.5 33.5 30.5 26.5
28 51.5 48 44.5 41.5 40 37 34 30.5 28 24
56 48.5 45 41.5 38.5 36.5 34 31 27.5 25 20.5
17 Range over which at least RBER performances are guaranteed (-25 dBm ÷ Threshold @ 10-6 +10dB)
216 MN.00273.E - 004

21.2.4 Radio flange

Consumption [W] Consumption [W]
34 36
Width [mm] Height [mm] Depth [mm]
270.4 287.3 154.6
- Weight of system components 4.3 Kg
MN.00273.E - 004 217

218 MN.00273.E - 004
Section 9.
LISTS AND SERVICES
22 LIST OF FIGURES
Fig.1 - Components electrostatic charge sensitive indication................................................ 10
Fig.2 - Elasticized band .................................................................................................. 10
Fig.3 - Coiled cord ......................................................................................................... 10
Fig.4 - Laser indication................................................................................................... 10
Fig.5 - WEEE symbol - 2002/96/CE EN50419 .................................................................... 11
Fig.6 - ALFOplus front/side view ...................................................................................... 20
Fig.7 - Reachable links in ALFOplus sub-network ............................................................... 21
Fig.8 - In-band management .......................................................................................... 22
Fig.9 - Drop node .......................................................................................................... 22
Fig.10 - LAO (Local Access Only) ..................................................................................... 22
Fig.11 - C60507 (48Vin 2 ports PoE injector) .................................................................... 48
Fig.12 - C60506 (48Vin 4 ports PoE injector) .................................................................... 48
Fig.13 - PoE injector interface ......................................................................................... 49
Fig.14 - ALFOplus GE ..................................................................................................... 53
Fig.15 - ALFOplus GO..................................................................................................... 54

Fig.16 - ALFOplus block diagram ..................................................................................... 57
Fig.17 - Synchronisation block diagram ............................................................................ 59
Fig.18 - ATPC diagram ................................................................................................... 61
Fig.19 - Available loops .................................................................................................. 62
Fig.20 -........................................................................................................................ 65
Fig.21 - Red curve......................................................................................................... 66
Fig.22 - Ethernet frame fragmentation disabled ................................................................. 68
Fig.23 - Ethernet frame fragmentation enabled ................................................................. 68
Fig.24 - Header compression .......................................................................................... 70
Fig.25 - Line trunking .................................................................................................... 71
Fig.26 - Hierarchical structure of maintenance domains ...................................................... 73
MN.00273.E - 004 219

Fig.27 - Node B and BTS synch ....................................................................................... 77
Fig.28 - SETS circuit ...................................................................................................... 77
Fig.29 - Synchronisation menu........................................................................................ 78
Fig.30 - Sources of synchronisation ................................................................................. 79
Fig.31 - Provide synchronism .......................................................................................... 80
Fig.32 - LAN synchronisation method ............................................................................... 82
Fig.33 - Grounding connection ........................................................................................ 87
Fig.34 - ODU with standard coupling kit ........................................................................... 95
Fig.35 - 1+0 ODU installation.......................................................................................... 96
Fig.36 - Polarization disk ................................................................................................ 97
Fig.37 - 1+1 ODU installation.......................................................................................... 98

Fig.38 - 1+0 antenna flange ........................................................................................... 99
Fig.39 - 1+1 antenna flange ......................................................................................... 100
Fig.40 - Functional drawing........................................................................................... 102

Fig.41 - Cable connection side M12 (screw connection)..................................................... 102
Fig.42 - Pin assignment M12 socket, 5-pos., A-coded, socket side view .............................. 102
Fig.43 - Dimensioned drawing - M12 connector ............................................................... 103

Fig.44 - T-568A Straight-Through Ethernet cable ............................................................. 104
Fig.45 - RJ-45 Pinout ................................................................................................... 105
Fig.46 - Indoor RJ45 unshielded assembly ...................................................................... 105

Fig.47 ........................................................................................................................ 105
Fig.48 ........................................................................................................................ 106
Fig.49 ........................................................................................................................ 107

Fig.50 - Cable connector keys ....................................................................................... 108
Fig.51 -...................................................................................................................... 109
Fig.52 ........................................................................................................................ 109

Fig.53 - PO0032 .......................................................................................................... 110
Fig.54 - Connector positions ......................................................................................... 111
Fig.55 ........................................................................................................................ 112

Fig.56 - F03594 cable for laboratory use only.................................................................. 114
Fig.57 - F03608 cable for pointing (remove it after commission pointing)............................ 115
Fig.58 - ALFOplus connectors ........................................................................................ 116
Fig.59 - SFP LC/LC ...................................................................................................... 116
Fig.60 - SFP LC/OPEN END ........................................................................................... 116
Fig.61 - SFP LC/ SFP LC ............................................................................................... 117

Fig.62 - LC connector................................................................................................... 117
Fig.63 - SFP into ALFOplus............................................................................................ 117
Fig.64 - Locked connection ........................................................................................... 118

Fig.65 - Unplug SFP ..................................................................................................... 118
Fig.66 - IP address setting............................................................................................ 121
Fig.67 - Local area connection....................................................................................... 121

Fig.68 - Rescue login ................................................................................................... 122
Fig.69 - Bandwidth&Modulation, Local Link ID ................................................................. 123
220 MN.00273.E - 004

Fig.70 - Frequency and power setting ............................................................................ 124
Fig.71 - Port configuration ............................................................................................ 125
Fig.72 - Equipment properties ....................................................................................... 125
Fig.73 - Remote element list ......................................................................................... 126
Fig.74 - Main menu with Rx signal power level ................................................................ 128
Fig.75 - S/N measurement monitoring ........................................................................... 128
Fig.76 - Vertical and horizontal adjustment ..................................................................... 129
Fig.77 - Antenna aiming block....................................................................................... 130
Fig.78 - Software download procedure ........................................................................... 132
Fig.79 - Upgrade software ............................................................................................ 132
Fig.80 - Backup/Restore configuration............................................................................ 134

Fig.81 - Current alarm monitoring ................................................................................. 141
Fig.82 - Event log window ............................................................................................ 142
Fig.83 - Traffic management of "ALFOplus" unit............................................................... 144

Fig.84 - Local access only ............................................................................................. 145
Fig.85 - VLAN based in-band management ..................................................................... 146
Fig.86 - VLAN based In-band drop node ......................................................................... 146

Fig.87 - Out-of-band management................................................................................. 147
MN.00273.E - 004 221

222 MN.00273.E - 004
23 LIST OF TABLES
Tab.1 - Artificial respiration .............................................................................................. 9
Tab.2 - Go-return frequency ............................................................................................23
Tab.3 - Tx power............................................................................................................25
Tab.4 - Receiver thresholds (interleave enabled) ................................................................26
Tab.5 - Noise figure ........................................................................................................38

Tab.6 - ACM switching thresholds .....................................................................................39
Tab.7 - Guaranteed Ethernet Latency (ms) for ALFOplus .....................................................43
Tab.8 - Guaranteed Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s) for ALFOplus without Ethernet compression..45
Tab.9 - Interface characteristics .......................................................................................46

Tab.10 - Power consumption (W) .....................................................................................46
Tab.11 - PoE injector supported .......................................................................................47
Tab.12 - Code Table .......................................................................................................48

Tab.13 - Electrical characteristics .....................................................................................49
Tab.14 - Connectors .......................................................................................................49
Tab.15 - Description of alarms .........................................................................................49

Tab.16 - Type ................................................................................................................50
Tab.17 - Maximum length................................................................................................50
Tab.18 - ODU dimension .................................................................................................51

Tab.19 - bootstrap status display .....................................................................................56
Tab.20 - Mounting Instructions ........................................................................................88
Tab.21 - Torques for tightening screws..............................................................................91

Tab.22 - Waveguide bending radius according to frequency .................................................94
Tab.23 - Auxiliary power cable ....................................................................................... 101
Tab.24 - Pinout M12 connector....................................................................................... 103
Tab.25 - Part to be assembled ....................................................................................... 103
Tab.26 - List of Amphenol optical cable ........................................................................... 113
Tab.27 - Voltage measured in auxiliary port ..................................................................... 127
Tab.28 - Ethernet connection stability ............................................................................. 131
Tab.29 - Alarms ........................................................................................................... 136
Tab.30 - Configurations................................................................................................. 145
Tab.31 - RF band and RF filter band ............................................................................... 150
Tab.32 - Frequency band............................................................................................... 156
Tab.33 - Net Radio Throughput in Mbit/s versus channel bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment .. 157
Tab.34 - Filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 11GHz.................................................................. 157
Tab.35 - 10700 MHz - 11700 MHz band - Go-return 490 MHz - Frequency carrier limits ......... 158
Tab.36 - 10700 MHz - 11700 MHz band - Go-return 530 MHz - Frequency carrier limits ......... 159
MN.00273.E - 004 223

quency carrier limits ...................................................................................................... 159
Tab.39 - Maximum transmit power ................................................................................. 161
Tab.40 - Equivalent Noise Bandwidth [MHz] .................................................................... 162
Tab.41 - Signal to Noise Ratio [dB] ................................................................................ 162
Tab.42 ........................................................................................................................ 163
Tab.43 - Receiver Dynamic Range [dB] ........................................................................... 164
Tab.44 - Power consumption.......................................................................................... 165
Tab.45 - Physical size of system components ................................................................... 165

Tab.47 - Net Radio Throughput in Mbit/s versus Channel Bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment 167
Tab.48 - RF filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 13GHz .............................................................. 167
Tab.49 - 12.75 ÷ 13.25 GHz band - Go-Return 266 MHz - Frequency carrier limits................ 168
Tab.50 - Maximum transmit power ................................................................................ 169
Tab.51 - Equivalent Noise Bandwidth .............................................................................. 170
Tab.52 - Signal to Noise Ratio [dB] ................................................................................ 170

Tab.53 - Guaranteed receiver sensitivities [dBm].............................................................. 171
Tab.54 - Receiver Dynamic Range .................................................................................. 172

Tab.56 - Physical size of system components .................................................................. 172
Tab.58 - Net Radio throughput in Mbit/s versus Channel Bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment .. 174
Tab.59 - RF filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 15 GHz ............................................................. 175
Tab.60 - 14501 - 14348 MHz band - Go-Return 420 MHz - Frequency carrier limits ............... 176
Tab.61 - 1403 - 15348 MHz band - Go-return 490 MHz - Frequency carrier limits.................. 177
Tab.65 -Maximum transmit power ................................................................................. 181
Tab.66 - Equivalent Noise Bandwidth [MHz] ..................................................................... 182
Tab.67 - Signal to Noise Ratio (dB) ................................................................................. 182
Tab.69 - Receiver Dynamic Range .................................................................................. 184
Tab.71 - Physical size of system components ................................................................... 184
Tab.73 - Net Radio Throughput in Mbit/s versus Channel Bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment . 186
Tab.75 - 17100 MHz ÷ 17300 MHz band - Go-return 144 MHz - Frequency carrier limits ........ 186
Tab.76 - Maximum transmit power ................................................................................ 187

Tab.78 - Signal to Noise Ratio (dB)................................................................................. 188
224 MN.00273.E - 004

Tab.80 - Receiver Dynamic Range (dB) ........................................................................... 189
Tab.84 - Net Radio Throughput in Mbit/s versus Channel Bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment . 192
Tab.86 - 17700 MHz ÷ 19700 MHz band - Go-return 1010 - Frequency carrier limits ............. 193
Tab.87 - 17700 MHz ÷ 18140 MHz paired with 19260 MHz - 19700 MHz band go-return 1560 MHz
- Frequency carrier limits ............................................................................................... 194
Tab.88 - 17700 MHz ÷ 18140 MHz paired with 19260 MHz 17700 MHz ÷ 19700 MHz band - FCC
CFR Title 47 Part 101 - Go-Return 1560 MHz - Frequency carrier limits................................. 194
Tab.89 - Maximum transmit power ................................................................................. 195

Tab.91 - Signal to Noise Ratio (dB)................................................................................. 196
Tab.93 - Receiver Dynamic Range (dB) ........................................................................... 199


Tab.97 - Net radio throughtput in Mbit/s versus channel bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment .. 201
Tab.98 - RF filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 23 GHz ............................................................. 201
Tab.99 - 21200 MHz ÷ 23600 MHz band - ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 3 and CEPT T/R 13-02 -
Go-return 1008 MHz - Frequency carrier limits .................................................................. 202
Tab.100 - 21200 MHz ÷ 23600 MHz band - ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 1 - Go-return 1232 MHz - Fre-
Tab.101 - 21200 MHz ÷ 23600 MHz band - ITU-R F.637-3 Annex 4 - Go-return 1200 MHz - Fre-
Tab.102 - 21200 MHz ÷ 23600 MHz band - FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101 - Go-Return 1200 MHz -
Frequency carrier limits.................................................................................................. 204
Tab.103 - Maximum transmit power ............................................................................... 206
Tab.104 - Equivalent Noise Bandwidth [MHz] ................................................................... 207

Tab.105 - Signal to Noise Ratio (dB) ............................................................................... 207
Tab.106 - Guaranteed receiver sensitivities [dBm] ........................................................... 209
Tab.107 - Receiver Dynamic Range (dB) ........................................................................ 210
Tab.108 - Power Consumption ....................................................................................... 211
Tab.109 - Physical size of system components ................................................................ 211
Tab.110 - Frequency band ............................................................................................. 212
Tab.111 - Net Radio Throughput in Mbit/s versus Channel Bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment 213
Tab.112 - RF filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 38 GHz ........................................................... 213
Tab.113 - 37058 MHz ÷ 39438 MHz band - Go-Return 1260 MHz - frequency carrier limits .... 213
Tab.114 - Maximum transmit power ............................................................................... 214
Tab.115 - Equivalent Noise Bandwidth (MHz) .................................................................. 215
Tab.116 - Signal to Noise Ratio (dB) ............................................................................... 215
Tab.117 - Guaranteed receiver sensitivities (dBm) ............................................................ 216
MN.00273.E - 004 225

Tab.118 - Receiver Dynamic Range (dB) ......................................................................... 216
Tab.119 - Power consumption ........................................................................................ 217
Tab.120 - Physical size of system components ................................................................. 217
226 MN.00273.E - 004

24 ASSISTANCE SERVICE
For more information, refer to the section relevant to the technical support on the Internet site of the com-
pany manufacturing the product.
MN.00273.E - 004 227

228 MN.00273.E - 004

Manual Book ALFOPlus - Mn00273e - 2 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Book ALFOPlus - Mn00273e - 2 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Book ALFOPlus - Mn00273e - 2 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ALFOplus

Access Link Full Outdoor

1 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY ............................................................................... 7

2 FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK AND SAFETY RULES .......................................... 8

3 PURPOSE AND STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL ............................................................12

4 LIST OF ACRONYMS .................................................................................................15

5 SYSTEM PRESENTATION ..........................................................................................17

6 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION ....................................................................................23

7 EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................52

8 INSTALLATION OF ALFOPlus SYSTEM ......................................................................85

9 LINE-UP OF ALFOPlus SYSTEM ...............................................................................119

10 ALFOPlus ALARMS AND LOOPS...............................................................................135

11 ALFOPlus MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING ...............................................139

12 PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION .......................................................................143

15 ALFOplus 11GHZ CHARACTERISTICS......................................................................156

16 ALFOPLUS 13GHz CHARACTERISTICS ....................................................................166

17 ALFOPLUS 15GHz CHARACTERISTICS ....................................................................173

18 ALFOPLUS 17 GHZ CHARACTERISTICS ...................................................................185

19 ALFOPLUS 18 GHZ CHARACTERISTICS ...................................................................191

20 ALFOPLUS 23 GHZ CHARACTERISTICS ...................................................................200

21 ALFOPLUS 38 GHZ CHARACTERISTICS ...................................................................212

22 LIST OF FIGURES ...................................................................................................219

23 LIST OF TABLES .....................................................................................................223

Digital Radio Relay System ALFOplus

The following standards have been applied:

IEEE 802.3 for Ethernet interface

EN 301 489-4 for EMC

EN 60950 for operator safety

EN 302 217 for digital point to point fixed radio

EN 300 132-2 characteristics of power supply

The equipment makes use of non-harmonized frequency bands.Following the requirements

Cologno Monzese, 17/03/2008 On behalf of SIAE MICROELETTRONICA

2.1 FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK

2.1.1 Artificial respiration

2.1.2 Treatment of burns

• Do not attempt to remove clothing from burnt sections

• Apply dry gauze on the burns

Step Description Figure

Lift the patient’s head and let it recline backwards as far

3 While performing these operations take a good supply of oxy-

While performing these operations observe if the patient’s

Start with ten rapid expirations, hence continue at a rate of

Fig.1 - Components electrostatic charge sensitive indication

Fig.2 - Elasticized band

Fig.3 - Coiled cord

Fig.4 - Laser indication

Fig.5 - WEEE symbol - 2002/96/CE EN50419

3.1 PURPOSE OF THE MANUAL

3.2 AUDIENCE BASIC KNOWLEDGE

• installation and maintenance experience on digital radio system

• a good knowledge of IP networks and routing policy.

3.3 STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL

Section 1 – User Guide

Section 2 – Description and specifications

The content of the tool kit (if supplied) is also listed.

Section 6 – Programming and supervision

Each description of software tools is supplied in a separated manual.

Section 9 – Indexes and services

4.1 LIST OF ACRONYMS